DG1000Z Programming Guide EN

DG1000Z_ProgrammingGuide_EN

User Manual:

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 264 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

RIGOL
Programming Guide
DG1000Z Series
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator
Oct. 2016
RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide I
Guaranty and Declaration
Copyright
© 2014 RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES, INC. All Rights Reserved.
Trademark Information
RIGOL is a registered trademark of RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Publication Number
PGB09106-1110
Notices
- RIGOL products are covered by P.R.C. and foreign patents, issued and pending.
- RIGOL reserves the right to modify or change parts of or all the specifications and pricing policies at
company’s sole decision.
- Information in this publication replaces all previously corresponding material.
- Information in this publication is subject to change without notice.
- RIGOL shall not be liable for losses caused by either incidental or consequential in connection with
the furnishing, use or performance of this manual as well as any information contained.
- Any part of this document is forbidden to be copied or photocopied or rearranged without prior written
approval of RIGOL.
Product Certification
RIGOL guarantees this product conforms to the national and industrial standards in China as well as the
ISO9001:2008 standard and the ISO14001:2004 standard. Other international standard conformance
certification is in progress.
Contact Us
If you have any problem or requirement when using our products or this manual, please contact RIGOL.
E-mail: service@rigol.com
Website: www.rigol.com
RIGOL
II DG1000Z Programming Guide
Document Overview
This manual introduces how to program the signal generator over the remote interfaces in details.
Main Topics in this Manual:
Chapter 1 Programming Overview
This chapter introduces how to build the remote communication between the signal generator and PC and
how to control the signal generator remotely. It also introduces the syntax, symbols, parameter types and
abbreviation rules of the SCPI commands.
Chapter 2 Command System
This chapter introduces the syntax, function, parameters and using instructions of each DG1000Z command
in A-Z order.
Chapter 3 Application Examples
This chapter provides the application examples of the main functions of the signal generator. In the
examples, a series of commands are combined to realize the basic functions of the signal generator.
Chapter 4 Programming Demos
This chapter introduces how to program and control DG1000Z using various development tools, such as
Visual C++, Visual Basic and LabVIEW.
Chapter 5 Appendix
This chapter provides the command list and the factory settings.
Tip
For the newest version of this manual, download it from www.rigol.com.
Format Conventions in this Manual:
1. Button
The function key at the front panel is denoted by the format of “Button Name (Bold) + Text Box” in the
manual, for example, Utility denotes the “Utility” key.
2. Menu
The menu item is denoted by the format of “Menu Word (Bold) + Character Shading” in the manual,
for example, System denotes the “System” item under Utility.
3. Operation Step
The next step of the operation is denoted by an arrow “” in the manual. For example, Utility
System denotes pressing Utility at the front panel and then pressing System.
Content Conventions in this Manual:
DG1000Z series function/arbitrary waveform generator includes the following models. Unless otherwise
noted in this manual, DG1062Z is taken as an example to introduce each command of the DG1000Z series.
Model Channels Max. Output Frequency
DG1062Z 2 60MHz
DG1032Z
2
30MHz
DG1022Z 2 25MHz
Contents RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide III
Contents
Guaranty and Declaration ......................................................................................................... I
Document Overview ................................................................................................................. II
Chapter 1 Programming Overview...................................................................................... 1-1
To Build Remote Communication ............................................................................................... 1-2
Remote Control Methods ........................................................................................................... 1-4
SCPI Command Overview .......................................................................................................... 1-4
Syntax ............................................................................................................................... 1-4
Symbol Description ............................................................................................................ 1-5
Parameter Type .................................................................................................................. 1-5
Command Abbreviation ...................................................................................................... 1-6
Chapter 2 Command System ............................................................................................... 2-1
:COUNter Commands ................................................................................................................ 2-3
:COUPling Commands ............................................................................................................... 2-9
:DISPlay Commands ............................................................................................................... 2-23
:HCOPy Commands ................................................................................................................. 2-28
IEEE488.2 Common Commands ............................................................................................... 2-29
:LICense Command ................................................................................................................ 2-37
:LXI Commands ...................................................................................................................... 2-38
:MEMory Commands ............................................................................................................... 2-41
:MMEMory Commands ............................................................................................................ 2-46
:OUTPut Commands ............................................................................................................... 2-55
:PA Commands ....................................................................................................................... 2-62
:ROSCillator Commands .......................................................................................................... 2-65
:SOURce Commands ............................................................................................................... 2-67
:SOURce:APPLy Commands .............................................................................................. 2-72
:SOURce:BURSt Commands .............................................................................................. 2-82
:SOURce:FREQuency Commands ...................................................................................... 2-92
:SOURce:FUNCtion Commands ....................................................................................... 2-101
:SOURce:HARMonic Commands ...................................................................................... 2-111
:SOURce:MARKer Commands .......................................................................................... 2-116
:SOURce[:MOD]:AM Commands ...................................................................................... 2-118
:SOURce[:MOD]:ASKey Commands ................................................................................. 2-123
:SOURce[:MOD]:FM Commands ...................................................................................... 2-127
:SOURce[:MOD]:FSKey Commands ................................................................................. 2-132
:SOURce[:MOD]:PM Commands ...................................................................................... 2-137
:SOURce[:MOD]:PSKey Commands ................................................................................. 2-142
:SOURce[:MOD]:PWM Commands ................................................................................... 2-146
:SOURce:MOD Commands .............................................................................................. 2-152
:SOURce:PERiod Command ............................................................................................ 2-154
:SOURce:PHASe Commands ........................................................................................... 2-155
:SOURce:PULSe Commands ............................................................................................ 2-156
:SOURce:SUM Commands .............................................................................................. 2-160
:SOURce:SWEep Commands ........................................................................................... 2-163
:SOURce:TRACe Commands ........................................................................................... 2-173
:SOURce:TRACK Command ............................................................................................. 2-180
:SOURce:VOLTage Comamnds ........................................................................................ 2-181
:SYSTem Commands ............................................................................................................. 2-188
:TRIGger Commands ............................................................................................................ 2-205
Chapter 3 Application Examples ......................................................................................... 3-1
To Output Basic Waveform ........................................................................................................ 3-2
To Output Arbitrary Waveform ................................................................................................... 3-2
To Output Harmonic Waveform .................................................................................................. 3-3
RIGOL Contents
IV DG1000Z Programming Guide
To Output AM Modulated Waveform ........................................................................................... 3-3
To Output FSK Modulated Waveform .......................................................................................... 3-4
To Output Sweep Waveform ...................................................................................................... 3-5
To Output Burst Waveform ........................................................................................................ 3-6
To Use the Frequency Counter Function...................................................................................... 3-6
Chapter 4 Programming Demos ......................................................................................... 4-1
Programming Preparations ......................................................................................................... 4-2
Excel Programming Demo .......................................................................................................... 4-3
Matlab Programming Demo........................................................................................................ 4-6
LabVIEW Programming Demo .................................................................................................... 4-7
Visual Basic Programming Demo .............................................................................................. 4-14
Visual C++ Programming Demo ............................................................................................... 4-17
Chapter 5 Appendix ............................................................................................................ 5-1
Appendix A: Command List ........................................................................................................ 5-1
Appendix B: Factory Setting ..................................................................................................... 5-10
Appendix C: Warranty ............................................................................................................. 5-14
Chapter 1 Programming Overview RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 1-1
Chapter 1 Programming Overview
This chapter introduces how to build the remote communication between the signal generator and PC and
how to control the signal generator remotely. It also introduces the syntax, symbols, parameter types and
abbreviation rules of the SCPI commands.
Main topics of this chapter:
To Build Remote Communication
Remote Control Methods
SCPI Command Overview
RIGOL Chapter 1 Programming Overview
1-2 DG1000Z Programming Guide
To Build Remote Communication
You can build the remote communication between DG1000Z and the PC via the USB (USB Device), LAN or
GPIB interface (option, extended from the USB Host interface using the USB-GPIB interface converter).
Operation Steps:
1. Install the Ultra Sigma common PC software
Download the Ultra Sigma common PC software from www.rigol.com and install it according to the
instructions.
2. Connect the instrument and PC and configure the interface parameters of the instrument
DG1000Z supports the USB, LAN and GPIB (option, extended from the USB Host interface using the
USB-GPIB interface converter) communication interfaces, as shown in the figure below.
(a)
(b)
Figure 1-1 DG1000Z Communication Interfaces
1) Use the USB interface: connect the USB Device interface at the rear panel of DG1000Z and the
USB Host interface of the PC using a USB cable. The “Found New Hardware Wizard” dialog box
will be displayed and please install the “USB Test and Measurement Device (IVI)” according to the
instructions (refer to “Remote Control via USB” in Chapter 3 “Remote Control” in
DG1000Z User’s
Guide
).
2) Use the LAN interface:
- Make sure that your PC is connected to the local network.
- Check whether your local network supports the DHCP or auto IP mode. If not, you need to
LAN USB Device
USB Host
Chapter 1 Programming Overview RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 1-3
acquire the network interface parameters available, such as the IP address, subnet mask,
default gateway and DNS service.
- Connect DG1000Z to the local network using a network cable.
- Press Utility I/O Config LAN to configure the IP address, subnet mask, default
gateway and DNS service.
3) Use the GPIB interface:
- Extend a GPIB interface by connecting the USB Host interface at the front panel of DG1000Z
using the USB-GPIB interface converter.
- Connect the instrument and PC using a GPIB cable.
- Press Utility I/O Config GPIB to set the GPIB address of the instrument.
3. Check whether the connection is successful
Start up the Ultra Sigma and the software will automatically search for the instrument resources
currently connected to the PC. Right click the resource name and select “SCPI Panel Control”. Input a
correct command in the pop-up SCPI control panel and click and
subsequentially or directly click to check whether the connection is successful, as
shown in the figure below (the USB interface is taken as an example).
RIGOL Chapter 1 Programming Overview
1-4 DG1000Z Programming Guide
Remote Control Methods
1. User-defined Programming
Users can use the SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) commands listed in
chapter 2 “Command System” of this manual to program and control the instrument in various
development environments (such as Visual C++, Visual Basic, LabVIEW and so on). For details, refer
to the introductions in chapter 4 “Programming Demos”.
2. Send SCPI Commands via the PC Software
You can control the signal generator remotely by sending the SCPI commands via the PC software
(Ultra Sigma) provided by RIGOL. Besides, you can also control the instrument using the
“Measurement & Automation Explorer” of NI (National Instruments Corporation) or the “Agilent IO
Libraries Suite” of Agilent (Agilent Technologies, Inc.).
SCPI Command Overview
SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) is a standardized instrument programming
language that is built upon the standard IEEE488.1 and IEEE 488.2 and conforms to various standards
(such as the floating point operation rule in IEEE754 standard, ISO646 7-bit coded character for
information interchange (equivalent to ASCll programming)). This section introduces the syntax, symbols,
parameters and abbreviation rules of the SCPI commands.
Syntax
The SCPI commands provide a hierarchical tree structure and include multiple subsystems. Each command
subsystem consists of a root keyword and one or more sub-keywords.The command string usually starts
with ":"; the keywords are separated by ":" and are followed by the parameter settings available; "?" is
added at the end of the command string to indicate query; the command and parameter are separated by
space.
For example,
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress <ip_address>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress?
SYSTem is the root keyword of the command. COMMunicate, LAN and IPADdress are the second-level,
third-level and forth-level keywords respectively. The command string starts with ":" which is also used to
separate the multiple-level keywords. <ip_address> represents the parameters available for setting. "?"
represents query; the instrument returns the corresponding information (the input value or internal setting
value of the instrument) when recieving the query command. The
command :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress and parameter <ip> are separated by space.
"," is generally used for separating multiple parameters contained in the same command, for example,
:DISPlay:TEXT[:SET] <quoted string>[,x[,y]]
Chapter 1 Programming Overview RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 1-5
Symbol Description
The following symbols are not the content of the SCPI commands and will not be sent with the commands.
They are usually used to describe the parameters in the commands.
1. Braces {}
Multiple optional parameters are enclosed in the braces and one of the parameters must be selected
when sending the command. For example, :DISPlay:MODE {DPV|DGV|SV}.
2. Vertical Bar |
The vertical bar is used to separate multiple parameters and one of the parameters must be selected
when sending the command. For example, :DISPlay:MODE {DPV|DGV|SV}.
3. Square Brackets []
The content (command keyword or parameter) in the square brackets can be omitted. If the parameter
is omitted, the instrument will set the parameter to its default. For example, for
the :COUNter:STATIstics[:STATe]? command, send any of the following two commands can achieve
the same effect.
:COUNter:STATIstics?
:COUNter:STATIstics:STATe?
4. Triangle Brackets <>
The parameter enclosed in the triangle brackets must be replaced by an effective value. For example,
sending the :COUNter:LEVEl <value> command in :COUNter:LEVEl 1 form.
Parameter Type
The parameters of the commands introduced in this manual contain the following 5 types: bool, integer,
real number, discrete and ASCII string.
1 Bool
The parameter could be ON (1) or OFF (0). For example, :COUNter:HF {ON|1|OFF|0}.
2 Integer
Unless otherwise noted, the parameter can be any integer within the effective value range. Note that
do not set the parameter to a decimal; otherwise, errors will occur. For example, in
the :DISPlay:BRIGhtness <brightness> command, <brightness> can be any integer from 0 to 100.
3 Real Number
Unless otherwise noted, the parameter can be any real number within the effective value range.
For example, the range of <value> in the :COUNter:LEVEl <value> command is from -2.5V to 2.5V.
4 Discrete
The parameter could only be one of the specified values or characters. For example, in
the :DISPlay:MODE {DPV|DGV|SV} command, the parameter can only be DPV, DGV or SV.
5 ASCII String
The parameter should be the combinations of ASCII characters. For example, in
the :MMEMory:LOAD:STATe <filename> command, <filename> is the filename of the state file to be
loaded under the current directory of the external memory and can include English characters and
numbers.
Besides, you can replace the parameters in many commands with MINimum or MAXimum to set the
parameters to their minimum or maximum value. For example, MINimum and MAXimum in
the :DISPlay:BRIGhtness {<brightness>|MINimum|MAXimum} command are used to set the brightness to
the minimum or maximum.
RIGOL Chapter 1 Programming Overview
1-6 DG1000Z Programming Guide
Command Abbreviation
All the commands are case-insensitive and you can use any of them. If abbreviation is used, all the capital
letters in the command must be written completely. For example, the :COUNter:COUPling? command can
be abbreviated to :COUN:COUP?.
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-1
Chapter 2 Command System
This chapter introduces the syntax, function, parameter and using instruction of each DG1000Z command
in A-Z order.
Main topics of this chapter:
:COUNter Commands
:COUPling Commands
:DISPlay Commands
:HCOPy Commands
IEEE488.2 Common Commands
:LICense Command
:LXI Commands
:MEMory Commands
:MMEMory Commands
:OUTPut Commands
:PA Commands
:ROSCillator Commands
:SOURce Commands
:SYSTem Commands
:TRIGger Commands
Explanation: In this command system, setting commands relating to the frequency and amplitude
parameters can be sent with units. The units available and the default unit of each parameter are as shown
in the table below.
Parameter Type Units Available Default Unit
Frequency MHz/kHz/Hz/uHz Hz
Sample Rate MSa/s、kSa/s、Sa/s、uSa/s Sa/s
Amplitude Vpp/mVpp/Vrms/mVrms/dBm Vpp/Vrms/dBm (depend on the
parameter to be set)
Offset VDC/mVDC VDC
High Level/Low Level V/mV V
Time s/ms/us/ns s
Phase ° °
Duty Cycle/
Modulation Depth/
Brightness/
Contrast
% %
Impedance Ω Ω
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-2 DG1000Z Programming Guide
Note:
- In this manual, the range of the parameter in the command is based on DG1062Z.
- As all the commands are case-insensitive, for DG1000Z, MHZ (mhz) and MSA/S (msa/s) are
interpreted as megahertz and mega points per second respectively; while MVPP (mvpp), MVRMS
(mvrms), MVDC (mvdc), MV (mv) and MS (ms) are interpreted as millivolt (peak-peak value), millivolt
(effective value), millivolt (DC), millivolt and millisecond respectively.
- When the output impedance is HighZ, the amplitude unit dBm is invalid.
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-3
:COUNter Commands
The :COUNter commands are used to turn on or off the frequency counter and set the related information
of the frequency counter.
Command List[1]:
:COUNter:AUTO
:COUNter:COUPling
:COUNter:GATEtime
:COUNter:HF
:COUNter:LEVEl
:COUNter:MEASure?
:COUNter:SENSitive
:COUNter[:STATe]
:COUNter:STATIstics:CLEAr
:COUNter:STATIstics:DISPlay
:COUNter:STATIstics[:STATe]
:COUNter:AUTO
Syntax :COUNter:AUTO
Description The instrument will select a proper gate time automatically according to the
characteristics of the signal under test after sending this command.
Explanation You can also send the :COUNter:GATEtime command to set the desired gate time.
Related
Command :COUNter:GATEtime
:COUNter:COUPling
Syntax :COUNter:COUPling {AC|DC}
:COUNter:COUPling?
Description Set the coupling mode of the input signal to AC or DC.
Query the coupling mode of the input signal.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{AC|DC} Discrete AC|DC AC
Return Format The query returns AC or DC.
Example :COUN:COUP DC /*Set the coupling mode of the input signal to DC*/
:COUN:COUP? /*Query the coupling mode of the input signal and the query
returns DC*/
Note[1]: In the “Command List” in this manual, the parameters in the setting commands and the query commands are
not included and you can refer to the complete introductions of the commands in the text according to the keywords.
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-4 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:COUNter:GATEtime
Syntax :COUNter:GATEtime {USER1|USER2|USER3|USER4|USER5|USER6}
:COUNter:GATEtime?
Description Select the gate time of the measurement system.
Query the gate time of the measurement system.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{USER1|USER2|USER3|
USER4|USER5|USER6} Discrete USER1|USER2|USER3|
USER4|USER5|USER6 USER1
Explanation The gate times represented by USER1 to USER6 are as shown in the table
below.
USER1 USER2 USER3 USER4 USER5 USER6
1.310ms 10.48ms 166.7ms 1.342s 10.73s >10s
For low-frequency signals (for example, the frequency is lower than 5Hz), you
are recommended to set the gate time to USER6.
Send the :COUNter:AUTO command and the instrument will select a proper gate
time automatically according to the characteristics of the signal under test.
During this process, “AUTO” is displayed in the gate time area in the frequency
counter interface. The gate time currently selected by the instrument will be
displayed in the gate time area in the frequency counter interface after the
instrument selects a proper gate time.
Return Format If users have currently selected a gate time, the query returns USER1, USER2,
USER3, USER4, USER5 or USER6. If users send the :COUNter:AUTO command to let
the instrument select a proper gate time automatically, the query returns “AUTO”
during this process and returns USER1, USER2, USER3, USER4, USER5 or USER6
after a proper gate time is selected by the instrument.
Example :COUN:GATE USER2 /*Set the gate time of the measurement system to USER2
(10.48ms)*/
:COUN:GATE? /*Query the gate time of the measurement system and the
query returns USER2*/
Related
Command :COUNter:AUTO
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-5
:COUNter:HF
Syntax :COUNter:HF {ON|1|OFF|0}
:COUNter:HF?
Description Enable or disable the high-frequency rejection function of the frequency counter.
Query the on/off status of the high-frequency rejection function of the frequency
counter.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation Enable the high-frequency rejection when measuring low-frequency signal with
lower than 250kHz frequency to filter out the high-frequency noise and improve
the measurement accuracy. Disable the high-frequency rejection when measuring
high-frequency signal with greater than 250kHz frequency; at this point, the
maximum input frequency is 200MHz.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :COUN:HF ON /*Enable the high-frequency rejection function of the frequency
counter*/
:COUN:HF? /*Query the on/off status of the high-frequency rejection
function of the frequency counter and the query returns ON*/
:COUNter:LEVEl
Syntax :COUNter:LEVEl {<value>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:COUNter:LEVEl? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the trigger level of the frequency counter.
Query the trigger level of the frequency counter.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<value> Real -2.5V to 2.5V 0V
Explanation The frequency counter starts measuring when the input signal reaches the
specified trigger level.
The minimum resolution is 6mV.
Return Format The query returns the trigger level in scientific notation. The return value contains 7
effective digits, for example, 1.500000E+00 (the trigger level is 1.5V).
Example :COUN:LEVE 1.5 /*Set the trigger level of the frequency counter to 1.5V*/
:COUN:LEVE? /*Query the trigger level of the frequency counter and the
query returns 1.500000E+00*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-6 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:COUNter:MEASure?
Syntax :COUNter:MEASure?
Description Query the measurement results of the frequency counter.
Explanation When the frequency counter is in the “RUN” or “SINGLE” state, send this command
to query the measurement values. When the frequency counter is in the “STOP”
state, send this command to query the measurement values of the last
measurement.
Return Format The query returns a string consisting of 5 parts (represent the frequency, period,
duty cycle, positive pulse width and negative pulse width respectively) separated by
commas. Each part is expressed in scientific notation and contains 10 effective bits,
for example,
2.000000000E+03,5.000000000E-04,4.760800000E+01,2.380415000E-04,
2.619585000E-04 (represents the measurement result is 2kHz frequency, 500us
period, 47.608% duty cycle, 238.0415us positive pulse width and 261.9585us
negative pulse width).
When the frequency counter function is disabled, the query returns
0.000000000E+00,0.000000000E+00,
0.000000000E+00,0.000000000E+00,0.000000000E+00.
Example :COUN:MEAS? /*Query the measurement results of the frequency counter and
the query returns 2.000000000E+03,5.000000000E-04,
4.760800000E+01,2.380415000E-04,2.619585000E-04*/
:COUNter:SENSitive
Syntax :COUNter:SENSitive {<value>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:COUNter:SENSitive? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the trigger sensitivity of the frequency counter.
Query the trigger sensitivity of the frequency counter.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<value> Real 0% to 100% 25%
Explanation Relatively higher sensitivity is recommended for signal with small amplitude; low
sensitivity is recommended for low-frequency signal with large amplitude or signal
with slow rising edge to ensure more accurate measurement result.
Return Format The query returns the trigger sensitivity in scientific notation. The return value
contains 7 effective digits, for example, 3.000000E+01 (the trigger sensitivity of the
frequency counter is 30%).
Example :COUN:SENS 30 /*Set the trigger sensitivity of the frequency counter to 30%*/
:COUN:SENS? /*Query the trigger sensitivity of the frequency counter and
the query returns 3.000000E+01*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-7
:COUNter[:STATe]
Syntax :COUNter[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0|RUN|STOP|SINGLE}
:COUNter[:STATe]?
Description Set the status of the frequency counter.
Query the status of the frequency counter.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{ON|1|OFF|0|RUN|STOP|
SINGLE} Discrete ON|1|OFF|0|RUN|STOP|
SINGLE OFF
Explanation “ON” and “1” denote enabling the frequency counter function; “OFF” and “0”
denote disabling the frequency counter function; “RUN”, “STOP” and “SINGLE”
denote setting the running status of the frequency counter to “run”, “stop” and
“single” respectively.
The command for setting the running status (the parameter is RUN, STOP or
SINGLE) is only valid when the frequency counter function is enabled.
When the frequency counter function is enabled, the sync output of CH2 will be
disabled.
In the “RUN” status, the frequency counter measures the input signal
continuously according to the current configuration. In the “SINGLE” status, the
frequency counter executes a measurement and then stops. In the “STOP”
status, the frequency counter stops measuring.
When the frequency counter is enabled, the default running status is “run” and
the instrument measures the input signal continuously according to the current
configuration. At this point, if you send the :COUNter:STATe SINGLE command,
the frequency counter enters the “single” status, finishes the current
measurement and then stops; if you send the :COUNter:STATe STOP command,
the frequency counter enters the “STOP” state immediately.
When the frequency counter is in the “STOP” status, the frequency counter
performs a measurement and then enters the “STOP” status each time you send
the :COUNter:STATe SINGLE command.
Return Format When the frequency counter function is enabled, the query returns the current
running status (RUN, STOP or SINGLE); when the frequency counter function is
disabled, the query returns OFF.
Example :COUN OFF /*Disable the frequency counter function*/
:COUN? /*Query the status of the frequency counter and the query returns
OFF*/
:COUN 1 /*Enable the frequency counter function*/
:COUN? /*Query the status of the frequency counter and the query returns
RUN (the default running status)*/
:COUN STOP /*Set the running status of the frequency counter to “STOP”*/
:COUN? /*Query the status of the frequency counter and the query returns
STOP*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-8 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:COUNter:STATIstics:CLEAr
Syntax :COUNter:STATIstics:CLEAr
Description Clear the statistic results.
Explanation This command is only valid when the statistic function of the frequency
counter is enabled (:COUNter:STATIstics[:STATe]).
The statistic results are cleared automatically when the statistic function of the
frequency counter is disabled.
Related
Command :COUNter:STATIstics[:STATe]
:COUNter:STATIstics:DISPlay
Syntax :COUNter:STATIstics:DISPlay {DIGITAL|CURVE}
:COUNter:STATIstics:DISPlay?
Description Set the display format of the statistic results of the measurement values of the
frequency counter to DIGITAL or CURVE.
Query the display format of the statistic results of the measurement values of the
frequency counter.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{DIGITAL|CURVE} Discrete DIGITAL|CURVE DIGITAL
Return Format The query returns DIGITAL or CURVE.
Example :COUN:STATI:DISP CURVE /*Set the display format of the statistic results of the
measurement values of the frequency counter to
CURVE*/
:COUN:STATI:DISP? /*Query the display format of the statistic results of
the measurement values of the frequency counter
and the query returns CURVE*/
:COUNter:STATIstics[:STATe]
Syntax :COUNter:STATIstics[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
:COUNter:STATIstics[:STATe]?
Description Enable or disable the statistic function of the measurement values of the frequency
counter.
Query the on/off status of the statistic function of the measurement values of the
frequency counter.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :COUN:STATI ON /*Enable the statistic function of the measurement values of
the frequency counter*/
:COUN:STATI? /*Query the on/off status of the statistic function of the
measurement values of the frequency counter and the query
returns ON*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-9
:COUPling Commands
The :COUPling commands are used to set the related information of the channel frequency coupling,
amplitude coupling and phase coupling as well as enable and disable the three coupling functions.
Command List:
:COUPling:AMPL:DEViation
:COUPling:AMPL:MODE
:COUPling:AMPL:RATio
:COUPling:AMPL[:STATe]
:COUPling:FREQuency:DEViation
:COUPling:FREQuency:MODE
:COUPling:FREQuency:RATio
:COUPling:FREQuency[:STATe]
:COUPling:PHASe:DEViation
:COUPling:PHASe:MODE
:COUPling:PHASe:RATio
:COUPling:PHASe[:STATe]
:COUPling[:STATe]
Note: The coupling function is only valid when both the two channels are in the basic waveform (Sine,
Square, Ramp) or arbitrary waveform (except DC) mode.
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-10 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:COUPling:AMPL:DEViation
Syntax :COUPling:AMPL:DEViation <deviation>
:COUPling:AMPL:DEViation?
Description Set the amplitude deviation in the amplitude coupling.
Query the amplitude deviation in the amplitude coupling.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<deviation> Real -19.998Vpp to 19.998Vpp
0Vpp
Explanation Select the desired amplitude coupling mode (:COUPling:AMPL:MODE) and set
the corresponding amplitude deviation or amplitude ratio
(:COUPling:AMPL:RATio) before enabling the amplitude coupling function
(:COUPling:AMPL[:STATe]). You cannot set the amplitude coupling mode and
amplitude deviation/ratio after the amplitude coupling function is enabled.
When the amplitude coupling function is disabled, if the current amplitude
coupling mode is amplitude deviation, send this command can set the amplitude
deviation; if the current amplitude coupling mode is amplitude ratio, send this
command can set the amplitude coupling mode to amplitude deviation and set
the amplitude deviation.
Return Format The query returns the amplitude deviation in scientific notation. The return value
contains 7 effective digits, for example, 1.000000E+00 (the amplitude deviation is
1Vpp).
Example :COUP:AMPL:DEV 1 /*Set the amplitude deviation in the amplitude coupling to
1Vpp*/
:COUP:AMPL:DEV? /*Query the amplitude deviation in the amplitude coupling
and the query returns 1.000000E+00*/
Related
Commands :COUPling:AMPL:MODE
:COUPling:AMPL:RATio
:COUPling:AMPL[:STATe]
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-11
:COUPling:AMPL:MODE
Syntax :COUPling:AMPL:MODE {OFFSet|RATio}
:COUPling:AMPL:MODE?
Description Set the amplitude coupling mode to amplitude deviation (OFFSet) or amplitude ratio
(RATio).
Query the selected amplitude coupling mode.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{OFFSet|RATio} Discrete OFFSet|RATio RATio
Explanation Amplitude deviation mode: the amplitudes of CH1 and CH2 have certain
deviation relation. The parameter relations are ACH2=ACH1+ADev (the reference
source is CH1); ACH1=ACH2-ADev (the reference source is CH2). Wherein, ACH1 is
the amplitude of CH1, ACH2 is the amplitude of CH2 and ADev is the amplitude
deviation.
Amplitude ratio mode: the amplitudes of CH1 and CH2 have certain ratio
relation. The parameter relations are ACH2=ACH1*ARatio (the reference source is
CH1); ACH1=ACH2/ARatio (the reference source is CH2). Wherein, ACH1 is the
amplitude of CH1, ACH2 is the amplitude of CH2 and ARatio is the amplitude ratio.
If the amplitude of CH1 or CH2 exceeds the amplitude upper limit or lower limit
of the channel after the channel coupling, the instrument will automatically
adjust the amplitude upper limit or lower limit of the other channel to avoid
parameter overrange.
Select the desired amplitude coupling mode and set the corresponding amplitude
deviation (:COUPling:AMPL:DEViation) or amplitude ratio
(:COUPling:AMPL:RATio) before enabling the amplitude coupling function
(:COUPling:AMPL[:STATe]). You cannot set the amplitude coupling mode and
amplitude deviation/ratio after the amplitude coupling function is enabled.
Return Format The query returns OFFSET or RATIO.
Example :COUP:AMPL:MODE OFFS /*Set the amplitude coupling mode to amplitude
deviation*/
:COUP:AMPL:MODE? /*Query the amplitude coupling mode and the query
returns OFFSET*/
Related
Commands :COUPling:AMPL:DEViation
:COUPling:AMPL:RATio
:COUPling:AMPL[:STATe]
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-12 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:COUPling:AMPL:RATio
Syntax :COUPling:AMPL:RATio {<value>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:COUPling:AMPL:RATio?
Description Set the amplitude ratio in the amplitude coupling.
Query the amplitude ratio in the amplitude coupling.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<value> Real 0.001 to 1000 1
Explanation Select the desired amplitude coupling mode (:COUPling:AMPL:MODE) and set
the corresponding amplitude deviation (:COUPling:AMPL:DEViation) or
amplitude ratio before enabling the amplitude coupling function
(:COUPling:AMPL[:STATe]). You cannot set the amplitude coupling mode and
amplitude deviation/ratio after the amplitude coupling function is enabled.
When the amplitude coupling function is disabled, if the current amplitude
coupling mode is amplitude ratio, send this command can set the amplitude
ratio; if the current amplitude coupling mode is amplitude deviation, send this
command can set the amplitude coupling mode to amplitude ratio and set the
amplitude ratio.
Return Format The query returns the amplitude ratio in scientific notation. The return value contains
7 effective digits, for example, 1.123000E+00 (the amplitude ratio is 1.123).
Example :COUP:AMPL:RAT 1.123 /*Set the amplitude ratio in the amplitude coupling to
1.123*/
:COUP:AMPL:RAT? /*Query the amplitude ratio in the amplitude coupling
and the query returns 1.123000E+00*/
Related
Commands :COUPling:AMPL:DEViation
:COUPling:AMPL:MODE
:COUPling:AMPL[:STATe]
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-13
:COUPling:AMPL[:STATe]
Syntax :COUPling:AMPL[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
:COUPling:AMPL[:STATe]?
Description Enable or disable the amplitude coupling function.
Query the on/off status of the amplitude coupling function.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation After the amplitude coupling function is enabled, CH1 and CH2 take each other as
the reference source. When the amplitude of a channel (this channel is the
reference source) is changed, the amplitude of the other channel changes
accordingly automatically and always keeps the specified amplitude deviation or
ratio with that of the reference channel.
Select the desired amplitude coupling mode (:COUPling:AMPL:MODE) and set the
corresponding amplitude deviation (:COUPling:AMPL:DEViation) or amplitude
ratio (:COUPling:AMPL:RATio) before enabling the amplitude coupling function.
You cannot set the amplitude coupling mode and amplitude deviation/ratio after
the amplitude coupling function is enabled.
You can also send the [:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage:COUPle[:STATe] command to
set or query the on/off status of the amplitude coupling function.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :COUP:AMPL ON /*Enable the amplitude coupling function*/
:COUP:AMPL? /*Query the on/off status of the amplitude coupling function and
the query returns ON*/
Related
Commands :COUPling:AMPL:DEViation
:COUPling:AMPL:MODE
:COUPling:AMPL:RATio
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage:COUPle[:STATe]
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-14 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:COUPling:FREQuency:DEViation
Syntax :COUPling:FREQuency:DEViation <deviation>
:COUPling:FREQuency:DEViation?
Description Set the frequency deviation in the frequency coupling.
Query the frequency deviation in the frequency coupling.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<deviation> Real -59.999 999 999 999MHz to
59.999 999 999 999MHz 0Hz
Explanation Select the desired frequency coupling mode (:COUPling:FREQuency:MODE) and
set the corresponding frequency deviation or frequency ratio
(:COUPling:FREQuency:RATio) before enabling the frequency coupling function
(:COUPling:FREQuency[:STATe]). You cannot set the frequency coupling mode
and frequency deviation/ratio after the frequency coupling function is enabled.
When the frequency coupling function is disabled, if the current frequency
coupling mode is frequency deviation, send this command can set the frequency
deviation; if the current frequency coupling mode is frequency ratio, send this
command can set the frequency coupling mode to frequency deviation and set
the frequency deviation.
You can also send the [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:OFFSet command to
set or query the frequency deviation in the frequency coupling.
Return Format The query returns the frequency deviation in scientific notation. The return value
contains 7 effective digits, for example, 1.000000E+02 (the frequency deviation is
100Hz).
Example :COUP:FREQ:DEV 100 /*Set the frequency deviation in the frequency coupling to
100Hz*/
:COUP:FREQ:DEV? /*Query the frequency deviation in the frequency coupling
and the query returns 1.000000E+02*/
Related
Commands :COUPling:FREQuency:MODE
:COUPling:FREQuency:RATio
:COUPling:FREQuency[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:OFFSet
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-15
:COUPling:FREQuency:MODE
Syntax :COUPling:FREQuency:MODE {OFFSet|RATio}
:COUPling:FREQuency:MODE?
Description Set the frequency coupling mode to frequency deviation (OFFSet) or frequency ratio
(RATio).
Query the selected frequency coupling mode.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{OFFSet|RATio} Discrete OFFSet|RATio RATio
Explanation Frequency deviation mode: the frequencies of CH1 and CH2 have certain
deviation relation. The parameter relations are FCH2=FCH1+FDev (the reference
source is CH1); FCH1=FCH2-FDev (the reference source is CH2). Wherein, FCH1 is the
frequency of CH1, FCH2 is the frequency of CH2 and FDev is the frequency
deviation.
Frequency ratio mode: the frequencies of CH1 and CH2 have certain ratio
relation. The parameter relations are FCH2=FCH1*FRatio (the reference source is
CH1); FCH1=FCH2/FRatio (the reference source is CH2). Wherein, FCH1 is the
frequency of CH1, FCH2 is the frequency of CH2 and FRatio is the frequency ratio.
If the frequency of CH1 or CH2 exceeds the frequency upper limit or lower limit of
the channel after the channel coupling, the instrument will automatically adjust
the frequency upper limit or lower limit of the other channel to avoid parameter
overrange.
Select the desired frequency coupling mode and set the corresponding frequency
deviation (:COUPling:FREQuency:DEViation) or frequency ratio
(:COUPling:FREQuency:RATio) before enabling the frequency coupling function
(:COUPling:FREQuency[:STATe]). You cannot set the frequency coupling mode
and frequency deviation/ratio after the frequency coupling function is enabled.
You can also send the [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:MODE command to
set or query the frequency couplimg mode of the specified channel.
Return Format The query returns OFFSET or RATIO.
Example :COUP:FREQ:MODE OFFS /*Set the frequency coupling mode to frequency
deviation*/
:COUP:FREQ:MODE? /*Query the selected frequency coupling mode and the
query returns OFFSET*/
Related
Commands :COUPling:FREQuency:DEViation
:COUPling:FREQuency:RATio
:COUPling:FREQuency[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:MODE
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-16 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:COUPling:FREQuency:RATio
Syntax :COUPling:FREQuency:RATio {<value>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:COUPling:FREQuency:RATio?
Description Set the frequency ratio in the frequency coupling.
Query the frequency ratio in the frequency coupling.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<value> Real 0.000 001 to 1 000 000 1
Explanation Select the desired frequency coupling mode (:COUPling:FREQuency:MODE) and
set the corresponding frequency deviation (:COUPling:FREQuency:DEViation) or
frequency ratio before enabling the frequency coupling function
(:COUPling:FREQuency[:STATe]). You cannot set the frequency coupling mode
and frequency deviation/ratio after the frequency coupling function is enabled.
When the frequency coupling function is disabled, if the current frequency
coupling mode is frequency ratio, send this command can set the frequency
ratio; if the current frequency coupling mode is frequency deviation, send this
command can set the frequency coupling mode to frequency ratio and set the
frequency ratio.
You can also send the [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:RATio command to
set or query the frequency ratio in the frequency coupling.
Return Format The query returns the frequency ratio in scientific notation. The return value contains
7 effective digits, for example, 1.001230E+02 (the frequency ratio is 100.123).
Example :COUP:FREQ:RAT 100.123 /*Set the frequency ratio in the frequency coupling to
100.123*/
:COUP:FREQ:RAT? /*Query the frequency ratio in the frequency coupling
and the query returns 1.001230E+02*/
Related
Commands :COUPling:FREQuency:MODE
:COUPling:FREQuency:DEViation
:COUPling:FREQuency[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:RATio
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-17
:COUPling:FREQuency[:STATe]
Syntax :COUPling:FREQuency[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
:COUPling:FREQuency[:STATe]?
Description Enable or disable the frequency coupling function.
Query the on/off status of the frequency coupling function.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation When the frequency coupling mode is disabled, you can select the frequency
coupling mode and set the corresponding frequency deviation or frequency
ratio. After the frequency coupling function is enabled, CH1 and CH2 take each
other as the reference source. When the frequency of a channel (this channel is
the reference source) is changed, the frequency of the other channel changes
accordingly automatically and always keeps the specified frequency deviation or
ratio with that of the reference channel.
Select the desired frequency coupling mode (:COUPling:FREQuency:MODE) and
set the corresponding frequency deviation (:COUPling:FREQuency:DEViation) or
frequency ratio (:COUPling:FREQuency:RATio) before enabling the frequency
coupling function. You cannot set the frequency coupling mode and frequency
deviation/ratio after the frequency coupling function is enabled.
You can also send the [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle[:STATe] command
to set or query the status of the frequency counter function.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :COUP:FREQ ON /*Enable the frequency coupling function*/
:COUP:FREQ? /*Query the on/off status of the frequency coupling function and
the query returns ON*/
Related
Commands :COUPling:FREQuency:DEViation
:COUPling:FREQuency:MODE
:COUPling:FREQuency:RATio
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle[:STATe]
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-18 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:COUPling:PHASe:DEViation
Syntax :COUPling:PHASe:DEViation <deviation>
:COUPling:PHASe:DEViation?
Description Set the phase deviation in the phase coupling.
Query the phase deviation in the phase coupling.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<deviation> Real -360° to 360°
0
Explanation Select the desired phase coupling mode (:COUPling:PHASe:MODE) and set the
corresponding phase deviation or phase ratio (:COUPling:PHASe:RATio) before
enabling the phase coupling function (:COUPling:PHASe[:STATe]). You cannot
set the phase coupling mode and phase deviation/ratio after the phase coupling
function is enabled.
When the phase coupling function is disabled, if the current phase coupling mode
is phase deviation, send this command can set the phase deviation; if the current
phase coupling mode is phase ratio, send this command can set the phase
coupling mode to phase deviation and set the phase deviation.
Return Format The query returns the phase deviation in scientific notation. The return value contains
7 effective digits, for example, 9.000000E+01 (the phase deviation is 90°).
Example :COUP:PHAS:DEV 90 /*Set the phase deviation in the phase coupling to 90°*/
:COUP:PHAS:DEV? /*Query the phase deviation in the phase coupling and the
query returns 9.000000E+01*/
Related
Commands :COUPling:PHASe:MODE
:COUPling:PHASe:RATio
:COUPling:PHASe[:STATe]
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-19
:COUPling:PHASe:MODE
Syntax :COUPling:PHASe:MODE {OFFSet|RATio}
:COUPling:PHASe:MODE?
Description Set the phase coupling mode to phase deviation (OFFSet) or phase ratio (RATio).
Query the selected phase coupling mode.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{OFFSet|RATio} Discrete OFFSet|RATio RATio
Explanation Phase deviation mode: the phase of CH1 and CH2 have certain deviation relation.
The parameter relations are PCH2=PCH1+PDev (the reference source is CH1);
PCH1=PCH2-PDev (the reference source is CH2). Wherein, PCH1 is the phase of CH1,
PCH2 is the phase of CH2 and PDev is the phase deviation.
Phase ratio mode: the phase of CH1 and CH2 have certain ratio relation. The
parameter relations are PCH2=PCH1*PRatio (the reference source is CH1);
PCH1=PCH2/PRatio (the reference source is CH2). Wherein, PCH1 is the phase of CH1,
PCH2 is the phase of CH2 and PRatio is the phase ratio.
If the phase of CH1 or CH2 exceeds the phase upper limit or lower limit of the
channel after the channel coupling, the instrument will automatically adjust the
phase upper limit or lower limit of the other channel to avoid parameter
overrange.
Select the desired phase coupling mode and set the corresponding phase
deviation (:COUPling:PHASe:DEViation) or phase ratio (:COUPling:PHASe:RATio)
before enabling the phase coupling function (:COUPling:PHASe[:STATe]). You
cannot set the phase coupling mode and phase deviation/ratio after the phase
coupling function is enabled.
Return Format The query returns OFFSET or RATIO.
Example :COUP:PHAS:MODE OFFS /*Set the phase coupling mode to phase deviation*/
:COUP:PHAS:MODE? /*Query the phase coupling mode and the query
returns OFFSET*/
Related
Commands :COUPling:PHASe:DEViation
:COUPling:AMPL:RATio
:COUPling:PHASe[:STATe]
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-20 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:COUPling:PHASe:RATio
Syntax :COUPling:PHASe:RATio {<value>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:COUPling:PHASe:RATio?
Description Set the phase ratio in the phase coupling.
Query the phase ratio in the phase coupling.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<value> Real 0.01 to 100 1
Explanation Select the desired phase coupling mode (:COUPling:PHASe:MODE) and set the
corresponding phase deviation or phase ratio (:COUPling:PHASe:RATio) before
enabling the phase coupling function (:COUPling:PHASe[:STATe]). You cannot
set the phase coupling mode and phase deviation/ratio after the phase coupling
function is enabled.
When the phase coupling function is disabled, if the current phase coupling mode
is phase ratio, send this command can set the phase ratio; if the current phase
coupling mode is phase deviation, send this command can set the phase coupling
mode to phase ratio and set the phase ratio.
Return Format The query returns the phase ratio in scientific notation. The return value contains 7
effective digits, for example, 1.120000E+00 (the phase ratio is 1.12).
Example :COUP:PHAS:RAT 1.12 /*Set the phase ratio in the phase coupling to 1.12*/
:COUP:PHAS:RAT? /*Query the phase ratio in the phase coupling and the
query returns 1.120000E+00*/
Related
Commands :COUPling:PHASe:MODE
:COUPling:PHASe:RATio
:COUPling:PHASe[:STATe]
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-21
:COUPling:PHASe[:STATe]
Syntax :COUPling:PHASe[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
:COUPling:PHASe[:STATe]?
Description Enable or disable the phase coupling function.
Query the on/off status of the phase coupling function.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation After the phase coupling function is enabled, CH1 and CH2 take each other as the
reference source. When the phase of a channel (this channel is the reference
source) is changed, the phase of the other channel changes accordingly
automatically and always keeps the specified phase deviation or ratio with that of
the reference channel.
Select the desired phase coupling mode (:COUPling:PHASe:MODE) and set the
corresponding phase deviation (:COUPling:PHASe:DEViation) or phase ratio
(:COUPling:PHASe:RATio) before enabling the phase coupling function. You
cannot set the phase coupling mode and phase deviation/ratio after the phase
coupling function is enabled.
When the phase coupling function is disabled, you can select the phase coupling
mode and set the corresponding phase deviation or ratio.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :COUP:PHAS ON /*Enable the phase coupling function*/
:COUP:PHAS? /*Query the on/off status of the phase coupling function and the
query returns ON*/
Related
Commands :COUPling:PHASe:DEViation
:COUPling:PHASe:MODE
:COUPling:PHASe:RATio
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-22 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:COUPling[:STATe]
Syntax :COUPling[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
:COUPling[:STATe]?
Description Enable or disable the frequency coupling, phase coupling and amplitude coupling of
the channel at the same time.
Query the on/off states of the frequency coupling, phase coupling and amplitude
coupling of the channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation DG1000Z supports the frequency, amplitude and phase coupling functions. After
the coupling functions are enabled, CH1 and CH2 take each other as the
reference source. When the frequency, amplitude or phase of a channel (this
channel is the reference source) is changed, the frequency, amplitude or phase
of the other channel changes accordingly automatically and always keeps the
specified frequency deviation/ratio, amplitude deviation/ratio or phase
deviation/ratio with that of the reference channel.
You can also enable or disable the frequency coupling function
(:COUPling:FREQuency[:STATe]), phase coupling function
(:COUPling:PHASe[:STATe]) and amplitude coupling function
(:COUPling:AMPL[:STATe]) respectively.
Return Format The query returns a string consisting of 3 parts (represent the on/off states of the
frequency coupling, phase coupling and amplitude coupling functions in order)
separated by commas, for example, FREQ:ON,PHASE:OFF,AMPL:OFF.
Example :COUP ON /*Enable the frequency coupling, phase coupling and amplitude
coupling of the channel at the same time*/
:COUP? /*Query the on/off states of the frequency coupling, phase coupling
and amplitude coupling of the channel and the query returns
FREQ:ON,PHASE:ON,AMPL:ON*/
Related
Commands :COUPling:AMPL[:STATe]
:COUPling:FREQuency[:STATe]
:COUPling:PHASe[:STATe]
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-23
:DISPlay Commands
The :DISPlay commands are used to set the display-related information, display the specified characters on
the screen and clear the characters displayed on the screen.
Command List:
:DISPlay:BRIGhtness
:DISPlay:CONTrast
:DISPlay:DATA?
:DISPlay:MODE
:DISPlay:SAVer:IMMediate
:DISPlay:SAVer[:STATe]
:DISPlay[:STATe]
:DISPlay:TEXT?
:DISPlay:TEXT:CLEar
:DISPlay:TEXT[:SET]
:DISPlay:BRIGhtness
Syntax :DISPlay:BRIGhtness {<brightness>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:DISPlay:BRIGhtness? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the screen brightness.
Query the screen brightness.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<brightness> Integer 1% to 100% 50%
Return Format The query returns the screen brightness in scientific notation. The return value
contains 7 effective digits, for example, 5.100000E+01 (the screen brightness is
51%).
Example :DISP:BRIG 51 /*Set the screen brightness to 51%*/
:DISP:BRIG? /*Query the screen brightness and the query returns
5.100000E+01*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-24 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:DISPlay:CONTrast
Syntax :DISPlay:CONTrast {<contrast>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:DISPlay:CONTrast? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the screen contrast.
Query the screen contrast.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<contrast> Integer 1% to 100% 25%
Return Format The query returns the screen contrast in scientific notation. The return value
contains 7 effective digits, for example, 2.800000E+01 (the screen contrast is
28%).
Example :DISP:CONT 28 /*Set the screen contrast to 28%*/
:DISP:CONT? /*Query the screen contrast and the query returns
2.800000E+01*/
:DISPlay:DATA?
Syntax :DISPlay:DATA?
Description Query the image of the front panel screen (screenshot).
Explanation You can also send the :HCOPy:SDUMp:DATA? to query the image of the front panel
screen.
Return Format The query returns a definite-length binary data block containing the image. The
block starts with #. For example, #9000230456BM6\x84\x03\x00......; wherein, “9”
following “#” denotes that the 9 characters following (000230456) are used to
denote the data length.
Related
Command :HCOPy:SDUMp:DATA?
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-25
:DISPlay:MODE
Syntax :DISPlay:MODE {DPV|DGV|SV}
:DISPlay:MODE?
Description Set the display mode to dual-channel parameters (DPV), dual-channel graph (DGV)
or single-channel (SV) display mode.
Query the display mode.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{DPV|DGV|SV} Discrete DPV|DGV|SV DPV
Explanation Dual-channel parameters (DPV): display the parameters and waveforms of the
two channels in both the digital and graph forms.
Dual-channel graph (DGV): display the waveforms of the two channels in
graph form.
Single-channel (SV): display the parameters and waveform of the channel
currently selected in both the digital and graph forms.
Return Format The query returns DPV, DGV or SV.
Example :DISP:MODE DGV /*Set the display mode to dual-channel graph*/
:DISP:MODE? /*Query the display mode and the query returns DGV*/
:DISPlay:SAVer:IMMediate
Syntax :DISPlay:SAVer:IMMediate
Description Enable the screen saver immediately without waiting.
:DISPlay:SAVer[:STATe]
Syntax :DISPlay:SAVer[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
:DISPlay:SAVer[:STATe]?
Description Enable or disable the screen saver function.
Query the on/off status of the screen saver function.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 ON
Explanation When the screen saver function is enabled, the instrument enters the screen saver
mode automatically when you stop operating the instrument for more than 15
minutes and it enters the black screen state automatically after another 30 minutes.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :DISP:SAV OFF /*Disable the screen saver function*/
:DISP:SAV? /*Query the on/off status of the screen saver function and the
query returns OFF*/
:DISP:SAV 1 /*Enable the screen saver function*/
:DISP:SAV? /*Query the on/off status of the screen saver function and the
query returns ON*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-26 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:DISPlay[:STATe]
Syntax :DISPlay[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
:DISPlay[:STATe]?
Description Enable or disable the screen display.
Query the status of the screen display.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 ON
Explanation The disabling the screen display function is only valid when the instrument is in the
remote mode. When the instrument returns to the local mode, the screen display is
enabled automatically. Press Help at the front panel to make the instrument return
to the local mode from the remote mode.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :DISP OFF /*Disable the screen display*/
:DISP? /*Query the status of the screen display and the query returns
OFF*/
:DISP 1 /*Enable the screen display*/
:DISP? /*Query the status of the screen display and the query returns ON*/
:DISPlay:TEXT?
Syntax :DISPlay:TEXT?
Description Query the string currently displayed on the screen.
Explanation You can send the :DISPlay:TEXT:CLEar command to clear the string currently
displayed on the screen.
Return Format The query returns a string enclosed in double quotation marks and the content in
the double quotation marks is the content currently displayed on the screen (the
double quotation marks at the outermost of the string are not displayed on the
screen), for example, ”RIGOL”.
Example :DISP:TEXT "RIGOL",25,35 /*Display the string RIGOL from (25,35) on the
screen*/
:DISP:TEXT? /*Query the string currently displayed on the screen
and the query returns ”RIGOL”*/
Related
Command :DISPlay:TEXT:CLEar
:DISPlay:TEXT:CLEar
Syntax :DISPlay:TEXT:CLEar
Description Clear the string currently displayed on the screen.
Explanation You can send the :DISPlay:TEXT? command to query the string currently displayed
on the screen.
Related
Command :DISPlay:TEXT?
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-27
:DISPlay:TEXT[:SET]
Syntax :DISPlay:TEXT[:SET] <quoted string>[,x[,y]]
Description Display the specified string from the specified coordinate on the screen.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<quoted string> ASCII string Refer to the
“Explanation” None
x Integer 2 to 319 2
y Integer 2 to 239 2
Explanation <quoted string> is a string enclosed in double quotation marks (note that the
double quotation marks at the outermost of the string are not displayed on the
screen), for example, ”RIGOL”. The specified string can contain up to 45
characters and the command is invalid when the specified string exceeds 45
characters. The specified string will be truncated when it cannot be displayed in
a single row.
The x and y in [,x[,y]] denotes the coordinate setting values of the X axis (the
horizontal axis) and Y axis (the vertical axis) respectively (the coordinate values
set are the coordinate values of the upper-left corner of the string displayed on
the screen). When only one coordinate value is specified, the instrument treated
it as the horizontal axis value (x) by default. When the parameters are omitted,
the instrument displays the specified string from the last effective coordinate (if
no coordinate has been set after power-on, the default coordinate will be used).
You can send the :DISPlay:TEXT? command to query the string currently
displayed on the screen or send the :DISPlay:TEXT:CLEar command to clear the
string currently displayed on the screen.
Return Format The query returns a string enclosed in double quotation marks and the content in the
double quotation marks is the content currently displayed on the screen (the double
quotation marks at the outermost of the string are not displayed on the screen), for
example, ”RIGOL”.
Example :DISP:TEXT "RIGOL",25,35 /*Display the string RIGOL from (25,35) on the
screen*/
Related
Commands :DISPlay:TEXT?
:DISPlay:TEXT:CLEar
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-28 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:HCOPy Commands
The :HCOPy commands are used to set or query the format of the image returned of the screenshot
operation and execute the screenshot operation.
Command List:
:HCOPy:SDUMp:DATA?
:HCOPy:SDUMp:DATA:FORMat
:HCOPy:SDUMp:DATA?
Syntax :HCOPy:SDUMp:DATA?
Description Query the image displayed on the front panel screen (screenshot).
Explanation You can also send the :DISPlay:DATA? command to query the image displayed on
the front panel screen.
Return Format The query returns a definite-length binary data block containing the image. The
block starts with #. For example,
#9000230456BM6\x84\x03\x00......; wherein, “9” following “#” denotes that the 9
characters following (000230456) are used to denote the data length.
Related
Command :DISPlay:DATA?
:HCOPy:SDUMp:DATA:FORMat
Syntax :HCOPy:SDUMp:DATA:FORMat BMP
:HCOPy:SDUMp:DATA:FORMat?
Description Set the format of the image returned of the screenshot operation to BMP.
Query the format of the image returned of the screenshot operation.
Return Format The query returns BMP.
Example :HCOP:SDUM:DATA:FORM BMP /*Set the format of the image returned of the
screenshot operation to BMP*/
:HCOP:SDUM:DATA:FORM? /*Query the format of the image returned of
the screenshot operation and the query
returns BMP*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-29
IEEE488.2 Common Commands
The IEEE488.2 standard defines a series of common commands used to execute various functions, such as
the reset, self-test and status operations.
Command List:
*CLS
*ESE
*ESR?
*IDN?
*OPC
*OPT?
*PSC
*RCL
*RST
*SAV
*SRE
*STB?
*TRG
*WAI
*CLS
Syntax *CLS
Description Clear the event registers of all the register sets and the error queue.
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-30 DG1000Z Programming Guide
*ESE
Syntax *ESE <value>
*ESE?
Description Enable the bits to be reported to the status byte register in the standard event
register.
Query the bits enabled in the standard event register.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<value> Integer Refer to the “Explanation” None
Explanation <value> is a decimal value corresponding to the sum of the binary weights of
the bits to be reported to the status byte register in the standard event
register.
When <enable value> is set to 0, executing this command will clear the enable
register of the standard even register.
If you have configured the instrument using the *PSC 1 command, the enable
register of the standard event register will be cleared at the next power-on of
the instrument; if you have configured the instrument using the *PSC 0
command, the enable register of the standard event register will not be
cleared at the next power-on of the instrument.
Return Format The query returns a decimal value corresponding to the sum of the binary weights
of the bits enabled in the standard event register.
Related
Command *PSC
*ESR?
Syntax *ESR?
Description Query the event register of the standard event register.
Explanation The event register of the standard event register is read-only. Its bits are latched
and the event register will be cleared when you query it. Once a bit is set, the later
occurred events corresponding to that bit will be ignored until the register is cleared
by the query command or the *CLS command (used to clear the status).
Return Format The query returns a decimal value corresponding to the sum of the binary weights
of all the bits in the event register of the standard event register.
Related
Command *CLS
*IDN?
Syntax *IDN?
Description Query the ID string of the instrument.
Return Format The query returns the ID string of the instrument. The return value consists of 4
parts separated by commas, for example,
Rigol Technologies,DG1062Z,DG1ZA000000001,00.01.03; wherein, the first part is
the manufacturer name, the second part is the instrument model, the third part is
the instrument serial number and the forth part is the digital board version number.
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-31
*OPC
Syntax *OPC
*OPC?
Description Set the OPC (operation complete) bit in the standard event register after all the
previous commands that have been sent are executed.
Query whether all the previous commands that have been sent are executed. If yes,
return 1 to the output buffer.
Explanation Here, “operation complete” refers to that all the previous commands that have
been sent, including the *OPC command, are executed.
You can also use the *OPC (operation complete) or *OPC? (operation complete
query) command to set the system to output signal when finishing the sweep
or burst. The *OPC commands sets the OPC (operation complete) bit in the
standard event register after all the previous commands that have been sent
are executed; when the bus is used to trigger the sweep or burst, the system
can execute other commands before this bit is set. The *OPC? command
returns 1 to the output buffer after all the previous commands that have been
sent are executed and the system cannot execute any other command before
this command is completed.
Sending the *OPC? command (query command) and reading the result can
ensure synchronization.
When setting the instrument by programming (by executing command strings),
taking the *OPC command as the last command of the command queue can
determine when the command queue is completed (the OPC (operation
complete) bit in the standard event register is set after the command queue is
completed).
Return Format The query returns 1 or 0.
Example *OPC /*Configure the instrument to set the OPC (operation complete) bit in the
standard event register after all the previous commands that have been
sent are executed*/
*OPC? /*Query whether all the previous commands that have been sent are
executed. If yes, return 1 to the output buffer*/
*OPT?
Syntax *OPT?
Description Query whether the 16M internal memory option (Arb 16M) has been installed.
Return Format The query returns OFFICAL (the 16M internal memory option has been installed) or
UNINSTALL (the 16M internal memory option is not installed).
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-32 DG1000Z Programming Guide
*PSC
Syntax *PSC {0|1}
*PSC?
Description Enable or disable the function to clear the status byte enable register and standard
event enable register at power-on.
Query whether to clear the status byte enable register and standard event enable
register at power-on.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{0|1} Discrete 0|1 1
Explanation The *PSC 1 command means clearing the status byte enable register and
standard event enable register at power-on. The *PSC 0 command means the
status byte enable register and standard event enable register will not be
affected at power-on.
You can also send the *SRE 0 and *ESE 0 commands to clear the status byte
enable register and standard event enable register respectively.
Return Format The query returns 0 or 1.
Example *PSC 1 /*Enable the function to clear the status byte enable register and standard
event enable register at power-on*/
*PSC? /*Query the status clear setting at power-on and the query returns 1*/
Related
Commands *ESE
*SRE
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-33
*RCL
Syntax *RCL
{USER1|USER2|USER3|USER4|USER5|USER6|USER7|USER8|USER9|USER10|
ARB1|ARB2|ARB3|ARB4|ARB5|ARB6|ARB7|ARB8|ARB9|ARB10}
Description Recall the state file (USER) or arbitrary waveform file (ARB) stored in the specified
location in the internal non-volatile memory.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{USER1|USER2|USER3|
USER4|USER5|USER6|
USER7|USER8|USER9|
USER10|ARB1|ARB2|ARB3|
ARB4|ARB5|ARB6|ARB7|
ARB8|ARB9|ARB10}
Discrete
USER1|USER2|USER3|
USER4|USER5|USER6|
USER7|USER8|USER9|
USER10|ARB1|ARB2|ARB3|
ARB4|ARB5|ARB6|ARB7|
ARB8|ARB9|ARB10
None
Explanation The instrument provides 10 storage locations (numbered 1 to 10) in the
internal memory for storing the state files and arbitrary waveform files
respectively. Sending this command can recall the state file or arbitrary
waveform file stored in the specified storage location in the internal
non-volatile memory. Select number 1 to 10 to recall the state file or arbitrary
waveform file stored in the corresponding storage location respectively.
This command is only valid when an effective state file or arbitrary waveform
file is stored in the specified storage location in the internal non-volatile
memory.
The state file stored includes the waveforms, frequencies, amplitudes, offsets,
duty cycles, symmetries, phases, the modulation, sweep, burst parameters,
the frequency counter parameters of the two channels as well as the utility
parameters and system parameters under the Utility menu.
The arbitrary waveform file stores the voltage corresponding to each
waveform point in binary data form. In the sample rate editing mode, there are
only Sa points if the number of points is set to Sa and the voltage of each
point is the voltage set by users. In the period editing mode, if the number of
points is set to Sa, the voltages of the first Sa points is the voltages set by
users and the voltages of the (Sa+1)th point to 8192nd point are low level. The
voltage of each point occupies 2 bytes (namely 16 bits); wherein, the 14
low-order bits denote the voltage and the 2 high-order bits are not used.
Therefore, the format of the binary data is 0x0000 to 0x3FFF; wherein, 0x0000
corresponds to the low level of the arbitrary waveform and 0x3FFF
corresponds to the high level of the arbitrary waveform.
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-34 DG1000Z Programming Guide
*RST
Syntax *RST
Description Restore the instrument to its factory state.
Explanation Restore the instrument to its factory state (please refer to “Appendix B:
Factory Setting”) and it is not affected by the :MEMory:STATe:RECall:AUTO
command.
This command will stop the sweep or burst in progress in an abnormal way
and the screen display will be turned on if it is previously turned off (using
the :DISPlay[:STATe] command).
Related
Commands :DISPlay[:STATe]
:MEMory:STATe:RECall:AUTO
*SAV
Syntax *SAV
{USER1|USER2|USER3|USER4|USER5|USER6|USER7|USER8|USER9|USER10|
ARB1|ARB2|ARB3|ARB4|ARB5|ARB6|ARB7|ARB8|ARB9|ARB10}
Description Store the current instrument state (USER) or arbitrary waveform data (ARB) in the
specified storage location in the internal non-volatile memory with the default
name.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{USER1|USER2|USER3|
USER4|USER5|USER6|
USER7|USER8|USER9|
USER10|ARB1|ARB2|ARB3|
ARB4|ARB5|ARB6|ARB7|
ARB8|ARB9|ARB10}
Discrete
USER1|USER2|USER3|
USER4|USER5|USER6|
USER7|USER8|USER9|
USER10|ARB1|ARB2|
ARB3|ARB4|ARB5|ARB6|
ARB7|ARB8|ARB9|ARB10
None
Explanation The internal memory of the instrument provides 10 storage locations
(numbered 1 to 10) for the instrument state and arbitrary waveform data
respectively. The default sate file name is Scpin.RSF and the default arbitrary
waveform file name is Scpin.RAF; wherein, n corresponds to the number of the
storage location.
If the specified storage location already contains a file, this command will
store the current instrument state or arbitrary waveform data in the specified
storage location and directly overwrite the original file. If the original state file
in the specified storage location is locked (:MEMory:STATe:LOCK), this
command is invalid (do not overwrite the original file).
For the introductions of the state file and arbitrary waveform file, please refer
to the “Explanation” under the *RCL command.
You can send the *RCL command to recall the state file and arbitrary
waveform file stored in the internal non-volatile memory of the instrument.
Example *SAV USER1 /*Store the current instrument state in storage location 1 in the
internal non-volatile memory of the instrument with the filename
Scpi1.RSF*/
Related
Commands :MEMory:STATe:LOCK
*RCL
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-35
*SRE
Syntax *SRE <value>
*SRE?
Description Enable the bits in the status byte register to generate service request.
Query the bits enabled in the status byte register.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<value> Integer Refer to the “Explanation” None
Explanation <value> is a decimal value corresponding to the sum of the binary weights of
the bits enabled in the status byte register. The bits selected are accumulated
on bit6 (main accumulation bit) of the status byte register and service request
will be generated if any of the bits selected changes from 0 to 1.
When <value> is set to 0, executing this command will clear the enable
register of the status byte register.
If you have configured the instrument using the *PSC 1 command, the enable
register of the status byte register will be cleared at the next power-on of the
instrument; if you have configured the instrument using the *PSC 0 command,
the enable register of the status byte register will not be cleared at the next
power-on of the instrument.
Return Format The query returns a decimal value corresponding to the sum of the binary weights
of the bits enabled in the status byte register.
Related
Command *PSC
*STB?
Syntax *STB?
Description Query the status register of the status byte register.
Explanation This command cannot clear the service request. Bit6 (main accumulation bit) of the
status byte register will not be cleared as long as the condition that generates the
service request is still in effect.
Return Format The query returns a decimal value corresponding to the sum of the binary weights
of all the bits in the status register of the status byte register.
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-36 DG1000Z Programming Guide
*TRG
Syntax *TRG
Description Trigger a sweep or burst.
Explanation You can only trigger the sweep or burst via the remote interface when the
sweep or burst function is currently enabled and the trigger source is set to
manual (use the [:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SOURce or
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SOURce command).
You can also send the [:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger[:IMMediate] or
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger[:IMMediate] command to trigger a sweep or
burst when the sweep or burst function is currently enabled and the trigger
source is set to manual.
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger[:IMMediate]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger[:IMMediate]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SOURce
*WAI
Syntax
*WAI
Description Execute any other command via the interface after all the pending operations are
completed.
Explanation This command is only applicable to the triggered sweep mode or triggered burst
mode, and is used to ensure synchronization.
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-37
:LICense Command
The :LICense command is used to install the 16M internal memory option (used to expand the memory
depth of the arbitrary waveform).
Before installing the option, you need to acquire the option license through the following method.
1. Order this option (its ordering number is Arb16M-DG1000Z) to acquire the key.
2. Vist the website of RIGOL (www.rigol.com) and click Customer Center License Generate to
enter the license generation interface.
3. Input the correct Key, Sn (series number of the instrument and can be acquired by pressing Utility
System Info) and Identifying Code and click Generate to generate the option license.
Command List:
:LICense:INSTall
:LICense:SET
:LICense:INSTall
:LICense:SET
Syntax :LICense:INSTall <license>
:LICense:SET <license>
Description Install the 16M internal memory option.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<license> ASCII string Refer to the “Explanation” None
Explanation <license>, namely the option license (removing the hyphens), is a string of 28
bytes. It can include uppercase English letters and numbers.
Each instrument corresponds to an option license. If you need to use this
option, please order this option to acquire the key. Then, visit the website of
RIGOL
to generate the option license.
Example :LICense:INSTall SM9KD3YPMWNP2AQMST8J5H592EQT
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-38 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:LXI Commands
Command List:
:LXI:IDENtify[:STATE]
:LXI:MDNS:ENABle
:LXI:MDNS:HNAMe
:LXI:MDNS:SNAMe:DESired
:LXI:MDNS:SNAMe[:RESolved]?
:LXI:RESet
:LXI:RESTart
:LXI:IDENtify[:STATE]
Syntax :LXI:IDENtify[:STATE] {ON|1|OFF|0}
:LXI:IDENtify[:STATE]?
Description Turn on or off the LXI Identify indicator on the screen.
Query the on/off status of the LXI Identify indicator on the screen.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation The LXI Identify indicator can help you to identify the device related to the LAN
address.
Sending the *RST command will turn off the LXI Identify indicator.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :LXI:IDEN ON /*Turn on the LXI Identify indicator on the screen*/
:LXI:IDEN? /*Query the on/off status of the LXI Identify indicator on the
screen and the query returns ON*/
Related
Command *RST
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-39
:LXI:MDNS:ENABle
Syntax :LXI:MDNS:ENABle {ON|1|OFF|0}
:LXI:MDNS:ENABle?
Description Enable or disable the multiple DNS system (mDNS).
Query the status of the multiple DNS system (mDNS).
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 ON
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :LXI:MDNS:ENAB ON /*Enable the multiple DNS system*/
:LXI:MDNS:ENAB? /*Query the status of the multiple DNS system and the
query returns ON*/
:LXI:MDNS:HNAMe
Syntax :LXI:MDNS:HNAMe[:RESolved]?
Description Query the host name of the mDNS analyzed.
:LXI:MDNS:SNAMe:DESired
Syntax :LXI:MDNS:SNAMe:DESired <name>
:LXI:MDNS:SNAMe:DESired?
Description Set the service name of mDNS.
Query the service name of mDNS.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<name> ASCII string Refer to the
“Explanation” rigollan
Explanation <name> is a string and can include English letters and numbers.
This setting is stored in the non-volatile memory and will not change when the
instrument is turned off and then turned on again or when the *RST command
is sent.
Sending the :SYSTem:SECurity:IMMediate command will set the service name
of mDNS to its default.
Return Format The query returns a string, for example, RIGOL1.
Example :LXI:MDNS:SNAM:DES RIGOL1 /*Set the service name of mDNS to RIGOL1*/
LXI:MDNS:SNAM:DES? /*Query the service name of mDNS and the query
returns RIGOL1*/
Related
Command :SYSTem:SECurity:IMMediate
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-40 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:LXI:MDNS:SNAMe[:RESolved]?
Syntax :LXI:MDNS:SNAMe[:RESolved]?
Description Query the service name of mDNS analyzed.
:LXI:RESet
Syntax :LXI:RESet
Description Reset the LAN setting to the known operation state, beginning from DHCP. If DHCP
fails, AutoIP will be used.
Explanation Several seconds are required for the LAN interface to restart (depending on
your network) after sending this command.
If the LAN interface or specific LAN service is disabled, you must restart the
interface or service separately as well as turn off and restart the instrument to
make the LAN works normally.
:LXI:RESTart
Syntax :LXI:RESTart
Description Restart the LAN according to the current setting.
Explanation Several seconds are required for the LAN interface to restart (depending on your
network) after sending this command.
If the LAN interface or specific LAN service is disabled, you must restart the
interface or service separately as well as turn off and restart the instrument to
make the LAN works normally.
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-41
:MEMory Commands
The :MEMory commands are used to query the storage locations and the state files stored in the internal
non-volatile memory of the instrument, query whether state file is stored in the specified storage location,
delete, lock and unlock the state files in the internal memory, query and modify the filenames of the state
files stored as well as set the power-on configuration.
Command List:
:MEMory:NSTates?
:MEMory:STATe:CATalog?
:MEMory:STATe:DELete
:MEMory:STATe:LOCK
:MEMory:STATe:NAME
:MEMory:STATe:RECall:AUTO
:MEMory:STATe:VALid?
:MEMory:NSTates?
Syntax :MEMory:NSTates?
Description Query the number of storage locations for the state files in the non-volatile memory
of the internal memory of the instrument.
Return Format The query returns 10.
:MEMory:STATe:CATalog?
Syntax :MEMory:STATe:CATalog?
Description Query the state files stored in the internal non-volatile memory of the instrument.
Explanation The internal non-volatile memory of the instrument provides 10 state file storage
locations.
Return Format The query returns a string consisting of 10 parts (represent the filenames of the
files stored in locations 1 to 10 respectively) separated by commas, for example,
"Scpi1.RSF","Scpi2.RSF","0.RSF","1.RSF","012.RSF","","33.RSF","","",""; wherein,
the contents in the double quotation marks are the filenames of the files stored in
the corresponding locations; the query only returns a pair of double quotation
marks if no file is stored in the corresponding location.
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-42 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:MEMory:STATe:DELete
Syntax :MEMory:STATe:DELete
{USER1|USER2|USER3|USER4|USER5|USER6|USER7|USER8|USER9|USER10}
Description Delete the state file stored in the specified location in the internal non-volatile
memory of the instrument.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{USER1|USER2|USER3|
USER4|USER5|USER6|
USER7|USER8|USER9|
USER10}
Discrete
USER1|USER2|USER3|
USER4|USER5|USER6|
USER7|USER8|USER9|
USER10
None
Explanation The internal non-volatile memory of the instrument provides 10 state file
storage locations numbered USER1 to USER10 which representing the state
files stored in the specified locations respectively.
This command is valid only when the specified storage location contains a state
file and the file is not locked (:MEMory:STATe:LOCK). If the file stored in the
specified storage location is locked, please first unlock the file.
Example :MEM:STAT:DEL USER1 /*Delete the state file stored in the location 1 in the
internal non-volatile memory of the instrument */
Related
Command :MEMory:STATe:LOCK
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-43
:MEMory:STATe:LOCK
Syntax :MEMory:STATe:LOCK
{USER1|USER2|USER3|USER4|USER5|USER|6USER7|USER8|USER9|USER10},
{ON|1|OFF|0}
:MEMory:STATe:LOCK?
{USER1|USER2|USER3|USER4|USER5|USER|6USER7|USER8|USER9|USER10}
Description Lock or unlock the state file stored in the specified storage location in the internal
non-volatile memory of the instrument.
Query whether the state file stored in the specified storage location in the internal
non-volatile memory of the instrument is locked.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{USER1|USER2|USER3|
USER4|USER5|USER6|
USER7|USER8|USER9|
USER10}
Discrete
USER1|USER2|USER3|
USER4|USER5|USER6|
USER7|USER8|USER9|
USER10
None
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation The internal non-volatile memory of the instrument provides 10 state file
storage locations numbered USER1 to USER10 which representing the state
files stored in the specified locations respectively.
You can modify the filename of the locked file in the internal non-volatile
memory of the instrument (:MEMory:STATe:NAME) but you cannot delete the
locked file (:MEMory:STATe:LOCK). To delete the locked file, please first unlock
it.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example Assume that storage location 1 in the internal non-volatile memory of the
instrument contains a state file.
:MEM:STAT:LOCK USER1,ON /*Lock the state file stored in storage location 1 in
the internal non-volatile memory of the
instrument*/
:MEM:STAT:LOCK? USER1 /*Query whether the state file stored in storage
location 1 in the internal non-volatile memory of
the instrument is locked and the query returns
ON*/
Related
Commands :MEMory:STATe:NAME
:MEMory:STATe:LOCK
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-44 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:MEMory:STATe:NAME
Syntax :MEMory:STATe:NAME {0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9}[,<name>]
:MEMory:STATe:NAME? {0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9}
Description Modify the filename of the state file stored in the specified storage location of the
internal non-volatile memory of the instrument.
Query the filename of the state file stored in the specified storage location of the
internal non-volatile memory of the instrument.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9} Discrete 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9 None
<name> ASCII string Refer to the
“Explanation” NULL
Explanation The internal non-volatile memory of the instrument provides 10 state file storage
locations. The parameters 0 to 9 represent the state files in storage locations 1 to
10 respectively.
<name> is the specified filename and cannot exceed 9 characters. It can
contain Chinese characters, English uppercase characters and numbers;
wherein, a Chinese character occupies 2 characters. If the parameter is omitted,
the filename is empty.
This command is valid only when the specified storage location contains a state
file (:MEMory:STATe:VALid?).
Return Format The query returns a string enclosed in double quotation marks, for example,
"123.RSF"; wherein, 123 is the filename and .RSF is the filename suffix of the state
file.
Example :MEM:STAT:VAL? USER2 /*Query whether storage location 2 in the internal
non-volatile memory of the instrument contains a
state file and the query returns 1*/
:MEM:STAT:NAME 1,123 /* Modify the filename of the state file stored in storage
location 2 of the internal non-volatile memory of the
instrument to 123.RSF*/
:MEM:STAT:NAME? 1 /*Query the filename of the state file stored in storage
location 2 of the internal non-volatile memory of the
instrument and the query returns "123.RSF"*/
Related
Command :MEMory:STATe:VALid?
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-45
:MEMory:STATe:RECall:AUTO
Syntax :MEMory:STATe:RECall:AUTO {ON|1|OFF|0}
:MEMory:STATe:RECall:AUTO?
Description Set the instrument configuration to be used at the next power-on to last (ON or 1)
or default (OFF or 0).
Query the instrument configuration to be used at the next power-on.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{ ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation Last (ON or 1): the instrument uses the system configuration (include all the
system parameters and states except the channel on/off state) used before
the last power-off.
Default (OFF or 0): the instrument uses the factory default at power-on except
the parameters that will not be affected by a factory reset (refer to “Appendix
B: Factory Setting”).
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :MEM:STAT:RECall:AUTO ON /*Set the instrument configuration to be used at
the next power-on to last*/
:MEM:STAT:RECall:AUTO? /*Query the instrument configuration to be used at
the next power-on and the query returns ON*/
:MEMory:STATe:VALid?
Syntax :MEMory:STATe:VALid?
{USER1|USER2|USER3|USER4|USER5|USER|6USER7|USER8|USER9|USER10}
Description Query whether the specified storage location in the internal non-volatile memory of
the instrument contains a state file.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{USER1|USER2|USER3|
USER4|USER5|USER6|
USER7|USER8|USER9|
USER10}
Discrete
USER1|USER2|USER3|
USER4|USER5|USER6|
USER7|USER8|USER9|
USER10
None
Explanation The internal non-volatile memory of the instrument provides 10 state file storage
locations numbered USER1 to USER10 which representing the state files stored in
the specified locations respectively.
Return Format The query returns 1 or 0; wherein, 1 denotes that the specified storage location
contains a state file and 0 denotes that the specified storage location does not
contain a state file.
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-46 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:MMEMory Commands
The :MMEMory commands are used to query and set the related information of the external memory,
including querying the files and folders in the external memory, setting the current directory, copying the
file in the current directory to the specified directory, loading the file in the external memory, creating a
new folder and storing a file in the external memory.
Command List:
:MMEMory:CATalog[:ALL]?
:MMEMory:CATalog:DATA:ARBitrary?
:MMEMory:CATalog:STATe?
:MMEMory:CDIRectory
:MMEMory:COPY
:MMEMory:DELete
:MMEMory:LOAD[:ALL]
:MMEMory:LOAD:DATA
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe
:MMEMory:MDIRectory
:MMEMory:RDIRectory?
:MMEMory:RDIRectory
:MMEMory:STORe[:ALL]
:MMEMory:STORe:DATA
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-47
:MMEMory:CATalog[:ALL]?
Syntax :MMEMory:CATalog[:ALL]? [<folder>]
Description Query all the files and folders in the current directory.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<folder> ASCII string Valid directory in the
external memory "D:\"
Explanation This command is only applicable to the external memory.
<folder> is a valid directory in the external memory, including the D disk and
the folders in the D disk. It is a string enclosed in double quotation marks, for
example, "D:\" and "D:\Rigol".
Return Format The query returns a string in the following format: space used,space
available,"size,property,name",……; wherein, the units of the space used and space
available are byte, the property of the file is empty and the size is the space that it
occupies, the property of the folder is DIR and the size is the sum of the number of
the files and folders in the folder plus 1. For example,
28672,4102361088,"3,DIR,Rigol","80,,Rigol1.RAF","1360,,Rigol0.RSF" denotes
that for the external memory currently connected to the instrument, its space used
is 28672 bytes and the space available is 4102361088 bytes; it contains 1 folder
(Rigol) and the folder contains 2 files or folders; it contains 2 files of which the size
of the arbitrary waveform file (Rigol1.RAF) is 80 bytes and the size of the state file
(Rigol0.RSF) is 1360 bytes.
Example Assume that the current directory is D:\.
:MMEM:CAT? /*Query all the files and folders in the external memory and the
query returns
28672,4102361088,"3,DIR,Rigol","80,,Rigol1.RAF","1360,,Rigol
0.RSF"*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-48 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:MMEMory:CATalog:DATA:ARBitrary?
Syntax :MMEMory:CATalog:DATA:ARBitrary? [<folder>]
Description Query the arbitrary waveform file under the current operation directory.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<folder> ASCII string Valid directory in the
external memory "D:\"
Explanation This command is only applicable to the external memory.
<folder> is a valid directory in the external memory, including the D disk and the
folders in the D disk. It is a string enclosed in double quotation marks, for
example, "D:\" and "D:\Rigol".
Return Format The query returns a string in the following format: space used,space available,
"size,property,name",……; wherein, the units of the space used and space available
are byte, the property of the file is empty and the size is the space it occupies. For
example, 28672,4102361088,"80,,Rigol1.RAF" denotes that for the external memory
currently connected to the instrument, its space used is 28672 bytes and the space
available is 4102361088 bytes; it contains an arbitrary waveform file (Rigol1.RAF) and
its size is 80 bytes.
Example Assume that the current directory is D:\,
:MMEM:CAT:DATA:ARB? /*Query the arbitrary waveform file in the external
memory directory and the query returns
28672,4102361088,"80,,Rigol1.RAF"*/
:MMEMory:CATalog:STATe?
Syntax :MMEMory:CATalog:STATe? [<folder>]
Description Query the state file under the current operation directory.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<folder> ASCII string Valid directory in the
external memory "D:\"
Explanation This command is only applicable to the external memory.
<folder> is a valid directory in the external memory, including the D disk and the
folders in the D disk. It is a string enclosed in double quotation marks, for
example, "D:\" and "D:\Rigol".
Return Format The query returns a string in the following format: space used,space available,
"size,property,name",……; wherein, the units of the space used and space available
are byte, the property of the file is empty and the size is the space it occupies. For
example, 28672,4102361088,"1360,,Rigol0.RSF" denotes that for the external
memory currently connected to the instrument, its space used is 28672 bytes and the
space available is 4102361088 bytes; it contains an state file (Rigol0.RSF) and its size
is 1360 bytes.
Example Assume that the current directory is D:\.
:MMEM:CAT:STAT? /*Query the state file in the external memory directory and the
query returns
28672,4102361088,"1360,,Rigol0.RSF"*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-49
:MMEMory:CDIRectory
Syntax :MMEMory:CDIRectory <directory_name>
:MMEMory:CDIRectory?
Description Set the current directory.
Query the current directory.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<directory_name
> ASCII string Valid directory in the
external memory "D:\"
Explanation This command is only applicable to the external memory.
<folder> is a valid directory in the external memory, including the D disk and
the folders in the D disk. It is a string enclosed in double quotation marks, for
example, "D:\" and "D:\Rigol".
Return Format The query returns a string enclosed in double quotation marks and the content in the
double quotation marks is the current directory, for example, "D:\".
Example :MMEM:CDIR "D:\" /*Set the current directory to the D disk (external
memory)*/
:MMEM:CDIR? /*Query the current directory and the query returns "D:\"*/
:MMEMory:COPY
Syntax :MMEMory:COPY <directory_name>,<file_name>
Description Copy the file under the current directory in the external memory to the specified
directory in the external memory (not the current directory).
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<directory_name
> ASCII string Valid directory in the
external memory None
<file_name> ASCII string Filename of the file under
the current directory of the
external memory None
Explanation This command is only applicable to the external memory.
<folder> is a valid directory in the external memory, including the D disk and
the folders in the D disk. It is a string enclosed in double quotation marks, for
example, "D:\" and "D:\Rigol".
Example Assume that the current directory is D:\,
:MMEM:COPY "D:\Rigol","Rigol1.RAF" /*Copy the file Rigol1.RAF under the
external memory directory to "D:\Rigol"
(the Rigol folder in D disk)*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-50 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:MMEMory:DELete
Syntax :MMEMory:DELete <file_name>
Description Delete the specified file or empty folder in the current directory of the external
memory.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<file_name> ASCII string
The filename of the file or the
folder name of the empty folder in
the current directory of the
external memory
None
Return Format This command is only applicable to the external memory.
<file_name> is the filename of the file or the folder name of the empty folder
in the current directory of the external memory and it is a string enclosed in
double quotation marks, for example, "Rigol1.RAF".
Example Assume that the current directory is D:\,
:MMEM:DEL "Rigol1.RAF" /*Delete the file Rigol1.RAF in the external memory
(D:\)*/
:MMEMory:LOAD[:ALL]
Syntax :MMEMory:LOAD[:ALL] <file_name>
Description Load the specified state file or arbitrary waveform file in the current directory of the
external memory.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<file_name> ASCII string
The filename of the state file or
the arbitrary waveform file in the
current directory of the external
memory
None
Explanation This command is only applicable to the external memory.
<file_name> is the filename of the state file or the arbitrary waveform file in
the current directory of the external memory and it is a string enclosed in
double quotation marks, for example, "Rigol0.RSF".
If the file to be loaded is arbitrary waveform file, it will be loaded into the
current channel.
Example Assume that the current directory is D:\.
:MMEM:LOAD "Rigol0.RSF" /*Load the file Rigol0.RSF in the external memory
(D:\)*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-51
:MMEMory:LOAD:DATA
Syntax :MMEMory:LOAD:DATA[1|2] <file_name>
Description Load the specified arbitrary waveform file in the current directory of the external memory
into the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[1|2] Discrete 1|2 1
<file_name> ASCII string
The filename of the arbitrary
waveform file in the current
directory of the external
memory
None
Explanation This command is only applicable to the external memory.
[1|2] denotes the channel (CH1 or CH2) into which will the specified arbitrary
waveform file in the current directory of the external memory be loaded. When it is
omitted, the file will be loaded into CH1.
<file_name> is the filename of the arbitrary waveform file in the specified directory
of the external memory and it is a string enclosed in double quotation marks, for
example, "Rigol4.RAF".
Example Assume that the current directory is D:\Rigol,
:MMEM:LOAD:DATA "Rigol4.RAF" /*Load the arbitrary waveform file Rigol4.RAF in the
current directory of the external memory
(D:\Rigol) into the current channel*/
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe
Syntax :MMEMory:LOAD:STATe <file_name>
Description Load the specified state file in the current directory of the external memory.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<file_name> ASCII string The filename of the state file
in the current directory of the
external memory None
Explanation This command is only applicable to the external memory.
<file_name> is the filename of the state file in the current directory of the external
memory and it is a string enclosed in double quotation marks, for example,
"Rigol0.RSF".
Example Assume that the current directory is D:\.
:MMEM:LOAD "Rigol0.RSF" /*Load the state file Rigol0.RSF in the external memory
(D:\)*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-52 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:MMEMory:MDIRectory
Syntax :MMEMory:MDIRectory <dir_name>
Description Create a folder in the current directory of the external memory with the specified
name.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<dir_name> ASCII string Refer to the “Explanation” None
Explanation This command is only applicable to the external memory.
<dir_name> is a string enclosed in double quotation marks. The content in the
double quotation marks is the name of the folder to be created and cannot
exceed 9 characters (can be Chinese characters, English uppercase characters
and numbers; wherein, a Chinese character occupies 2 characters).
If D disk already contains a folder with the same name, the system prompts a
remote command error.
Example Assume that the current directory is D:\,
:MMEM:MDIR "RIGOL1" /*Create a folder named “RIGOL1” in D disk*/
:MMEMory:RDIRectory?
Syntax :MMEMory:RDIRectory?
Description Query the disk drive available.
Return Format The query returns a string in the form of "the number of disk drives available,"the
names of the disk drives available:"", for example, "1,"D:"" which denotes that
there is a disk drive available named D:. If there is no disk drive available currently,
the query returns "0,"NULL"".
:MMEMory:RDIRectory
Syntax :MMEMory:RDIRectory <folder>
Description Delete the specified directory (empty folder) in the external memory.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<folder> ASCII string Folder name of the empty
folder in the external
memory None
Example Assume that the external memory contains an empty folder named 111,
:MMEM:RDIR "111" /*Delete the empty folder 111 in the external memory*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-53
:MMEMory:STORe[:ALL]
Syntax :MMEMory:STORe[:ALL] <file_name>
Description Store the current instrument state or the arbitrary waveform data of the current
channel into the current directory of the external memory in state file or arbitrary
waveform file form with the specified name.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<file_name> ASCII string Filename of the specified
state file or arbitrary
waveform file None
Explanation This command is only applicable to the external memory.
<file_name> is a string enclosed in double quotation marks and the content in
the double quotation marks is the filename of the specified state file or
arbitrary waveform file (include the file type suffix .RSF or .RAF). The filename
cannot exceed 9 characters and can be Chinese characters, English characters
and numbers; wherein, a Chinese character occupies 2 characters.
Example Assume that the current directory is D:\,
:MMEM:STOR "R00.RSF" /*Store the current instrument state into D disk in the
state file form with the filename R00.RSF*/
:MMEMory:STORe:DATA
Syntax :MMEMory:STORe:DATA[1|2] <file_name>
Description Store the arbitrary waveform data of the specified channel into the current directory
of the external memory in arbitrary waveform file form with the specified filename.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[1|2] Discrete 1|2 1
<file_name> ASCII string Filename of the specified
arbitrary waveform file None
Explanation This command is only applicable to the external memory.
<file_name> is a string enclosed in double quotation marks and the content in
the double quotation marks is the filename of the specified arbitrary waveform
file (include the file type suffix .RAF). The filename cannot exceed 9 characters
and can be Chinese characters, English characters and numbers; wherein, a
Chinese character occupies 2 characters.
Example Assume that the current directory is D:\,
:MMEM:STOR:DATA "R11.RAF" /*Store the arbitrary waveform data of the
current channel into D disk in arbitrary
waveform file form with the filename
R11.RAF*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-54 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe
Syntax :MMEMory:STORe:STATe <file_name>
Description Store the current instrument state into the current directory of the external memory in
state file form with the specified filename.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<file_name> ASCII string Refer to the “Explanation" None
Explanation This command is only applicable to the external memory.
<file_name> is a string enclosed in double quotation marks and the content in the
double quotation marks is the filename of the specified state file (include the file
type suffix .RSF). The filename cannot exceed 9 characters and can be Chinese
characters, English characters and numbers; wherein, a Chinese character occupies
2 characters.
Example Assume that the current directory is D:\,
:MMEM:STOR:STAT "R22.RSF" /*Store the current instrument state into D disk in
state file form with the filename R22.RSF*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-55
:OUTPut Commands
The :OUTPut commands is used to set and query the information related to the channel output and sync
signal, including setting and querying the channel output state, output polarity, output impedance, output
mode and gate polarity as well as setting and querying the output state, output polarity and delay time of
the sync signal.
Command List:
:OUTPut[<n>]:GATe:POLarity
:OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
:OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD
:OUTPut[<n>]:MODE
:OUTPut[<n>]:POLarity
:OUTPut[<n>][:STATe]
:OUTPut[<n>]:SYNC:DELay
:OUTPut[<n>]:SYNC:POLarity
:OUTPut[<n>]:SYNC[:STATe]
:OUTPut[<n>]:GATe:POLarity
Syntax :OUTPut[<n>]:GATe:POLarity {POSitive|NEGative}
:OUTPut[<n>]:GATe:POLarity?
Description Set the gate polarity of the specified channel in the gated mode to POSitive or
NEGative.
Query the gate polarity of the specified channel in the gated mode.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{POSitive|NEGative} Discrete POSitive|NEGative POSitive
Explanation When [<n>] is omitted, the commands set and query the related parameters of
CH1 by default.
In the gated mode (:OUTPut[<n>]:MODE), the output state of the output
connector of the specified channel is controlled by the gated signal received by
the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the corresponding channel at the rear
panel.
Positive: when the gated signal is high level, the channel output connector
outputs signal.
Negative: when the gated signal is low level, the channel output connector
outputs signal.
Return Format The query returns POSITIVE or NEGATIVE.
Example :OUTP1:GAT:POL NEG /*Set the gate polarity of CH1 in the gated mode to
negative*/
:OUTP1:GAT:POL? /*Query the gate polarity of CH1 in the gated mode and the
query returns NEGATIVE*/
Related
Command :OUTPut[<n>]:MODE
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-56 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
:OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD
Syntax :OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance {<ohms>|INFinity|MINimum|MAXimum}
:OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD {<ohms>|INFinity|MINimum|MAXimum}
:OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance? [MINimum|MAXimum]
:OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the output impedance of the output connector of the specified channel.
Query the output impedance of the output connector of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<ohms> Integer 1Ω to 10kΩ 50Ω
Explanation When [<n>] is omitted, the commands set and query the related parameters
of CH1 by default.
<ohms> denotes setting the output impedance of the output connector of the
specified channel to a specified value within the range available; INFinity
denotes setting the output impedance of the output connector of the specified
channel to HighZ.
The output impedance setting affects the output amplitude and DC offset. If
the actual load is different from the specified value, the voltage level displayed
will not match the voltage level of the item under test. To ensure correct
voltage level, make sure that the load impedance setting matches the actual
load.
Return Format The query returns the output impedance in scientific notation with 7 effective
digits, for example, 1.000000E+02 which denotes that the output impedance is
100Ω. If the output impedance of the output connector of the specified channel is
set to INFinity, the query returns 9.900000E+37.
Example :OUTP1:IMP INF /*Set the output impedance of the output connector of CH1 to
HighZ*/
:OUTP1:IMP? /*Query the output impedance of the output connector of
CH1 and the query returns 9.900000E+37*/
:OUTP1:LOAD 100 /*Set the output impedance of the output connector of CH1
to 100Ω*/
:OUTP1:LOAD? /*Query the output impedance of the output connector of
CH1 and the query returns 1.000000E+02*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-57
:OUTPut[<n>]:MODE
Syntax :OUTPut[<n>]:MODE {NORMal|GATed}
:OUTPut[<n>]:MODE?
Description Set the output mode of the output connector of the specified channel to normal
(NORMal) or gated (GATed).
Query the output mode of the output connector of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{NORMal|GATed} Discrete NORMal|GATed NORMal
Explanation When [<n>] is omitted, the commands set and query the related parameters of
CH1 by default.
In the gated mode, the output state of the output connector of the specified
channel is controlled by the gated signal received by the
[Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the corresponding channel at the rear
panel. You can send the :OUTPut[<n>]:GATe:POLarity command to set the gate
polarity to “Positive” or “Negative”.
Positive: when the gated signal is high level, the channel output connector
outputs signal.
Negative: when the gated signal is low level, the channel output connector
outputs signal.
Return Format The query returns NORMAL or GATED.
Example :OUTP1:MODE GAT /*Set the output mode of the output connector of CH1 to
gated*/
:OUTP1:MODE? /*Query the output mode of the output connector of CH1 and
the query returns GATED*/
Related
Command :OUTPut[<n>]:GATe:POLarity
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-58 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:OUTPut[<n>]:POLarity
Syntax :OUTPut[<n>]:POLarity {NORMal|INVerted}
:OUTPut[<n>]:POLarity?
Description Set the output polarity of the specified channel to normal (NORMal) or inverted
(INVerted).
Query the output polarity of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{NORMal|INVerted} Discrete NORMal|INVerted NORMal
Explanation When [<n>] is omitted, the commands set and query the related parameters
of CH1 by default.
The output polarity of the channel refers to that the signal on the output
connector of the channel is normal (NORMal) output or inverted (INVerted)
output. In the normal mode, the instrument outputs normal waveform and in
the inverted mode, the waveform is inverted and then outputted.
The waveform is inverted relative to the offset voltage. After the waveform is
inverted, the offset voltage remains unchanged and the sync signal related to
the waveform is not inverted.
Return Format The query returns NORMAL or INVERTED.
Example :OUTP1:POL NORM /*Set the output polarity of CH1 to normal*/
:OUTP1:POL? /*Query the output polarity of CH1 and the query returns
NORMAL*/
:OUTPut[<n>][:STATe]
Syntax :OUTPut[<n>][:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
:OUTPut[<n>][:STATe]?
Description Turn on or off the output of the specified channel.
Query the output status of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation When [<n>] is omitted, the commands set and query the related parameters of
CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :OUTP1? /*Query the output status of CH1 and the query returns OFF*/
:OUTP1 ON /*Turn on the output of CH1*/
:OUTP1? /*Query the output status of CH1 and the query returns ON*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-59
:OUTPut[<n>]:SYNC:DELay
Syntax :OUTPut[<n>]:SYNC:DELay {<delay>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:OUTPut[<n>]:SYNC:DELay? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the output delay time of the sync signal on the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync]
connector of the specified channel at the rear panel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<delay> Real 0s to the carrier period 0s
Explanation The output delay time of the sync signal refers to the output delay time of the
sync signal on the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the specified channel
at the rear panel relative to the output signal of the output connector at the front
panel.
When [<n>] is omitted, the commands set and query the related parameters of
CH1 by default.
When the modulation ([:SOURce[<n>]]:MOD[:STATe]), sweep
([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe) or burst ([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe])
function is enabled, the delay setting is invalid.
Return Format The query returns the delay time of the sync signal in scientific notation with 7
effective digits, for example, 1.000000E-03 which denotes that the delay time of the
sync signal is 1ms (namely 0.001s).
Example :OUTP1:SYNC:DEL 0.001 /*Set the output delay time of the sync signal on the
[Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of CH1 at the rear
panel to 1ms (namely 0.001s)*/
:OUTP1:SYNC:DEL? /*Query the output delay time of the sync signal on the
[Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of CH1 at the rear
panel and the query returns 1.000000E-03*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:MOD[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-60 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:OUTPut[<n>]:SYNC:POLarity
Syntax :OUTPut[<n>]:SYNC:POLarity {POSitive|NEGative}
:OUTPut[<n>]:SYNC:POLarity?
Description Set the output polarity of the sync signal on the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector
of the specified channel at the rear panel to normal (POSitive) or inverted
(NEGative).
Query the output polarity of the sync signal on the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync]
connector of the specified channel at the rear panel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{POSitive|NEGative} Discrete POSitive|NEGative POSitive
Explanation When [<n>] is omitted, the commands set and query the related parameters of
CH1 by default.
The output polarity of the sync signal refers to that the sync signal on the
[Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the channel at the rear panel is normal
(POSitive) output or inverted (NEGative) output. In the normal mode, the
instrument outputs the sync signal normally and in the inverted mode, the sync
signal is inverted and then outputted.
After the waveform is inverted (:OUTPut[<n>]:POLarity), the sync signal related
to the waveform will not be inverted.
Return Format The query returns POS or NEG.
Example :OUTP1:SYNC:POL POS /*Set the output polarity of the sync signal on the
[Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of CH1 at the rear
panel to normal */
:OUTP1:SYNC:POL? /*Query the output polarity of the sync signal on the
[Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of CH1 at the rear
panel and the query returns POS*/
Related
Command :OUTPut[<n>]:POLarity
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-61
:OUTPut[<n>]:SYNC[:STATe]
Syntax :OUTPut[<n>]:SYNC[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
:OUTPut[<n>]:SYNC[:STATe]?
Description Enable or disable the sync signal outputted from the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync]
connector of the specified channel at the rear panel.
Query the output status of the sync signal outputted from the
[Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the specified channel at the rear panel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 ON
Explanation DG1000Z can output the sync signals of the basic waveform (except noise),
arbitrary waveform (except DC), harmonic, sweep waveform, burst and
modulated waveform from a single channel or both of the two channels at the
same time. The sync signals are outputted from the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync]
connector of the corresponding channel at the rear panel.
When [<n>] is omitted, the commands set and query the related parameters
of CH1 by default.
When the carrier frequency is greater than 30MHz, the sync signal will be
outputted in frequency dividing output mode.
If the sync signal is disabled, the mark signal used in the sweep will also be
disabled.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :OUTP1:SYNC 1 /*Enable the sync signal outputted from the
[Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of CH1 at the rear
panel*/
:OUTP1:SYNC? /*Query the output status of the sync signal outputted from
the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of CH1 at the rear
panel and the query returns ON*/
:OUTP1:SYNC OFF /*Disable the sync signal outputted from the
[Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of CH1 at the rear
panel*/
:OUTP1:SYNC? /*Query the output status of the sync signal outputted from
the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of CH1 at the rear
panel and the query returns OFF*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-62 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:PA Commands
The :PA commands are used to set and query the related information when the external power amplifier
(PA) is used, including setting and querying the on/off status, gain, output polarity and offset of the PA as
well as saving the working status of the PA to the internal memory of the instrument.
Command List:
:PA:GAIN
:PA:OFFSet[:STATe]
:PA:OFFSet:VALUe
:PA:OUTPut:POLarity
:PA:SAVE
:PA[:STATe]
:PA:GAIN
Syntax :PA:GAIN {1X|10X}
:PA:GAIN?
Description Set the gain of the signal amplification at the output terminal of the PA to 1X or 10X.
Query the gain of the signal amplification at the output terminal of the PA.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{1X|10X} Discrete 1X|10X 1X
Explanation 1X denotes outputting the signal without any gain. 10X denotes amplifying the signal
for 10 times and then outputting it.
Return Format The query returns 1X or 10X.
Example :PA:GAIN 10X /*Set the gain of the signal amplification at the output terminal of
the PA to 10X*/
:PA:GAIN? /*Query the gain of the signal amplification at the output terminal
of the PA and the query returns 10X*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-63
:PA:OFFSet[:STATe]
Syntax :PA:OFFSet[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
:PA:OFFSet[:STATe]?
Description Turn on or off the output offset at the output terminal of the PA.
Query the on/off status of the output offset at the output terminal of the PA.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation You can send the :PA:OFFSet:VALUe command to set the output offset at the
output terminal of the PA.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :PA:OFFS ON /*Turn on the output offset at the output terminal of the PA*/
:PA:OFFS? /*Query the on/off status of the output offset at the output
terminal of the PA and the query returns ON*/
Related
Command :PA:OFFSet:VALUe
:PA:OFFSet:VALUe
Syntax :PA:OFFSet:VALUe {<value>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:PA:OFFSet:VALUe? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the output offset at the output terminal of the PA.
Query the output offset at the output terminal of the PA.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<value> Real -12V to 12V 0V
Explanation You can send the :PA:OFFSet[:STATe] command to turn on or off the output offset
at the output terminal of the PA.
Return Format The query returns the output offset in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 1.234500E+00 (the output offset is 1.2345V).
Example :PA:OFFS:VALU 1.2345 /*Set the output offset at the output terminal of the PA to
1.2345V*/
:PA:OFFS:VALU? /*Query the output offset at the output terminal of the PA
and the query returns 1.234500E+00*/
Related
Command :PA:OFFSet[:STATe]
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-64 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:PA:OUTPut:POLarity
Syntax :PA:OUTPut:POLarity {NORMal|INVerted}
:PA:OUTPut:POLarity?
Description Set the output polarity of the signal at the output terminal of the PA to normal
(NORMal) or inverted (INVerted).
Query the output polarity of the signal at the output terminal of the PA.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{NORMal|INVerted} Discrete NORMal|INVerted NORMal
Explanation The output polarity of the signal at the output terminal of the PA refers to whether
the signal at the output terminal of the PA is outputted in normal (NORMal) mode or
inverted (INVerted) mode. In the normal mode, the signal is outputted normally; in
the inverted mode, the signal is inverted and then outputted.
Return Format The query returns NORMAL or INVERTED.
Example :PA:OUTP:POL NORM /*Set the output polarity of the signal at the output
terminal of the PA to NORMal*/
:PA:OUTP:POL? /*Query the output polarity of the signal at the output
terminal of the PA and the query returns NORMAL*/
:PA:SAVE
Syntax :PA:SAVE
Description Save the current working state of the PA into the internal memory of the
instrument.
Explanation The instrument will load the working state stored automatically when the PA is
turned on the next time.
:PA[:STATe]
Syntax :PA[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
:PA[:STATe]?
Description Turn on or off the external power amplifier.
Query the on/off status of the external power amplifier.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation When the external power amplifier is turned on, the PA amplifies the input signal
(namely the output signal of the signal generator) and then outputs the signal.
When it is turned off, there is no output from the PA.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :PA ON /*Turn on the external power amplifier*/
:PA? /*Query the on/off status of the external power amplifier and the query
returns ON*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-65
:ROSCillator Commands
The :ROSCillator commands are used to set the system clock source and the query the system clock source
currently selected.
Command List:
:ROSCillator:SOURce
:ROSCillator:SOURce:CURRent?
:ROSCillator:SOURce
Syntax :ROSCillator:SOURce {INTernal|EXTernal}
Description Set the system clock source to internal source (INTernal) or external source
(EXTernal).
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{INTernal|EXTernal} Discrete INTernal|EXTernal INTernal
Explanation DG1000Z provides a 10MHz internal clock source and can also receive the
external clock source inputted from the [10MHz In/Out] connector at the
rear panel. Besides, it can also output clock source for other devices via the
[10MHz In/Out] connector.
When the external clock source (EXTernal) is selected, the system detects
whether there is valid external clock signal inputted from the [10MHz
In/Out] connector at the rear panel. If not, the prompt message “Not detect
a valid external clock!” will be displayed and the system will switch to internal
clock source automatically.
You can send the :ROSCillator:SOURce:CURRent? command to query the clock
source currently selected.
You can use the clock source to realize the synchronization of two or more
instruments. When two instruments are synchronized, the “Align Phase”
function is not available (the “Align Phase” function is used to adjust the phase
relation between two output channels of the same instrument and cannot
change the phase relation between the output channels of two instruments).
You can change the phase relation between two instruments by changing the
start phase of each output channel ([:SOURce[<n>]]:PHASe[:ADJust]).
Example :ROSC:SOUR INT /*Set the system clock source to internal source*/
Related
Commands :ROSCillator:SOURce:CURRent?
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PHASe[:ADJust]
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-66 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:ROSCillator:SOURce:CURRent?
Syntax :ROSCillator:SOURce:CURRent?
Description Query the system clock source currently selected.
Explanation You can send the :ROSCillator:SOURce command to set the system clock source to
internal or external.
Return Format The query returns INT or EXT.
Example :ROSC:SOUR:CURR? /*Query the system clock source currently selected and
the query returns INT*/
Related
Command :ROSCillator:SOURce
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-67
:SOURce Commands
The :SOURce commands are used to set and query the channel parameters, the related parameters of the
modulation, sweep and burst functions, the coupling and waveform summing functions as well as turn on
and off the corresponding function.
The frequency ranges available for the different models and different waveforms of DG1000Z series are as
shown in the table below.
Table 2-1 Frequency ranges available for the different models and different waveforms of DG1000Z series
Frequency
Characteristic DG1022Z DG1032Z DG1062Z
Sine
Square
Ramp
Pulse
Harmonic
Noise (-3dB)
Arbitrary Waveform
1μHz to 25MHz
1μHz to 25MHz
1μHz to 500kHz
1μHz to 15MHz
1μHz to 10MHz
25MHz bandwidth
1μHz to 10MHz
1μHz to 30MHz
1μHz to 25MHz
1μHz to 500kHz
1μHz to 15MHz
1μHz to 10MHz
30MHz bandwidth
1μHz to 10MHz
1μHz to 60MHz
1μHz to 25MHz
1μHz to 1MHz
1μHz to 25MHz
1μHz to 20MHz
60MHz bandwidth
1μHz to 20MHz
Command List:
:SOURce:APPLy Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy?
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:ARBitrary
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:DC
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:HARMonic
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:NOISe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:PULSe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:RAMP
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:SINusoid
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:SQUare
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:TRIangle
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:USER
:SOURce:BURSt Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:GATE:POLarity
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:INTernal:PERiod
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:MODE
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:NCYCles
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:PHASe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TDELay
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger[:IMMediate]
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-68 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SLOPe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:TRIGOut
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt: IDLE
:SOURce:FREQuency Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:CENTer
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:MODE
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:OFFSet
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:RATio
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency[:FIXed]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:SPAN
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STOP
:SOURce:FUNCtion Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:ARBitrary:MODE
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:ARBitrary:SRATe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:DCYCle
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:HOLD
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:PERiod
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:TRANsition[:BOTH]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:TRANsition:LEADing
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:TRANsition:TRAiling
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:WIDTh
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:DCYCle
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:PERiod
:SOURce:HARMonic Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:AMPL
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:ORDEr
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:PHASe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:TYPe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:USER
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-69
:SOURce:MARKer Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:MARKer:FREQuency
[:SOURce[<n>]]:MARKer[:STATe]
:SOURce[:MOD]:AM Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM[:DEPTh]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:DSSC
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:STATe
:SOURce[:MOD]:ASKey Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:AMPLitude
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:INTernal[:RATE]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:POLarity
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:STATe
:SOURce[:MOD]:FM Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM[:DEViation]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:INTernal:FREQuency
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:STATe
:SOURce[:MOD]:FSKey Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey[:FREQuency]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:INTernal:RATE
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:POLarity
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:STATe
:SOURce[:MOD]:PM Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM[:DEViation]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:INTernal:FREQuency
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:STATe
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-70 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SOURce[:MOD]:PSKey Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:INTernal:RATE
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:PHASe
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:POLarity
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:STATe
:SOURce[:MOD]:PWM Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM[:DEViation]:DCYCle
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM[:DEViation][:WIDTh]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:INTernal:FREQuency
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:STATe
:SOURce:MOD Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:MOD[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:MOD:TYPe
:SOURce:PERiod Command
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PERiod[:FIXed]
:SOURce:PHASe Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PHASe[:ADJust]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PHASe:INITiate
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PHASe:SYNChronize
:SOURce:PULSe Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:DCYCle
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:HOLD
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:TRANsition[:LEADing]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:TRANsition:TRAiling
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:WIDTh
:SOURce:SUM Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM:AMPLitude
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM:INTernal:FREQuency
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM:INTernal:FUNCtion
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM[:STATe]
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-71
:SOURce:SWEep Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:HTIMe:STARt
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:HTIMe[:STOP]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:RTIMe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:SPACing
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STEP
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TIME
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger[:IMMediate]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SLOPe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:TRIGOut
:SOURce:TRACe Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:CATalog?
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:COPY
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:DAC16
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:DAC
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA[:DATA]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:DELete[:NAME]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:LOAD
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:LOCK[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:POINts
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:VALue
:SOURce:TRACK Command
[:SOURce[<n>]]:TRACK
:SOURce:VOLTage Comamnds
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage:COUPle[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:HIGH
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LOW
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage:UNIT
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-72 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SOURce:APPLy Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy?
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy?
Description Query the waveform type as well as the frequency, amplitude, offset and phase of the
specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the command queries the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The channel waveform types and the corresponding returned waveform names
are as shown in the table below.
Sine Square Ramp Pulse Noise Arbitrary Waveform
DC Except DC
SIN SQU RAMP PULSE NOISE DC USER
Return Format The query returns a string enclosed in double quotation marks. The return value
consists of 5 parts separated by commas; wherein, the first part is the waveform
name of the specified channel and the rest 4 parts are the frequency, amplitude,
offset and phase (in scientific notation form with 7 effective digits and the default
units are Hz, Vpp, VDC and ° respectively; the absent item is replaced by DEF) of the
waveform of the specified channel respectively. For example,
"SQU,1.000000E+03,2.000000E+00,3.000000E+00,4.000000E+00" which denotes
that the current waveform is square, the frequency is 1kHz, the amplitude is 2Vpp, the
offset is 3V
DC
and the start phase is 4°.
Example
SOUR
1:APPL? /*Query the waveform type as well as the frequency, amplitude,
offset and phase of CH1 and the query returns
"SQU,1.000000E+03,2.000000E+00,3.000000E+00,4.000000E+0
0"*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-73
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:ARBitrary
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:ARBitrary
[{<sample_rate>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum}
[,{<amplitude>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum}[,{<offset>|DEFault|MINimum|MA
Ximum}]]]
Description Set the waveform of the specified channel to arbitrary waveform with the specified
sample rate, amplitude, offset and start phase (in sample rate output mode).
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<sample_rate> Real 1uSa/s to 60MSa/s 20MSa/s
<amplitude> Real Refer to the
“Explanation” 5Vpp
<offset> Real Refer to the
“Explanation” 0VDC
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
This command only selects and sets the arbitrary waveform parameters of the
channel and does not set the arbitrary waveform type. The default arbitrary
waveform is Sinc. You can send the [:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]
command to select the desired arbitrary waveform for specified channel.
The range of <amplitude> is limited by the “Impedance”
(:OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance or :OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD) setting. The range of
<offset> is limited by the “Impedance” and “Amplitude/High Level” settings.
Example :SOUR1:APPL:ARB 100,1,2 /*Set the waveform of CH1 to arbitrary waveform
with 100Sa/s sample rate, 1Vpp amplitude and
2V
DC
offset*/
Related
Commands :OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
:OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-74 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:DC
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:DC [{<frequency>|DEF}[,{<amplitude>|DEF}
[,{<offset>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum}]]]
Description Set the waveform of the specified channel to DC with the specified offset.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<offset> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 0V
DC
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
<frequency> and <amplitude> are not applicable to the DC function but they
must be specified as a placeholder.
The range of <offset> is limited by the “Impedance”
(:OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance or :OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD) setting.
Return Format Set the waveform of the specified channel to DC with the specified offset.
Example :SOUR1:APPL:DC 1,1,2 /*Set the waveform of CH1 to DC with 2VDC offset*/
Related
Commands :OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
:OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-75
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:HARMonic
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:HARMonic
[<freq>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum[,<amp>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum
[,<offset>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum[,<phase>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum]
]]]
Description Enable the harmonic function of the specified channel and set the fundamental
waveform (sine) parameters (frequency, amplitude, offset and phase).
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<freq> Real 1uHz to 20MHz 1kHz
<amp> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 5Vpp
<offset> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 0VDC
<phase> Real 0° to 360° 0°
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The range of <amp> is limited by the “Impedance”
(:OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance or :OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD) and “Frequency/Period”
settings. The range of <offset> is limited by the “Impedance” and
“Amplitude/High Level” settings.
When this command is executed, the instrument uses the default harmonic
parameters or the harmonic parameters set at the last time. You can send the
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic series commands to set the desired harmonic
parameters and enable or disable the harmonic function.
Example :SOUR1:APPL:HARM 100,1,2,3 /*Enable the harmonic function of CH1 and set
the fundamental waveform (sine) parameters
to 100Hz frequency, 1Vpp amplitude, 2VDC
offset and 3° start phase*/
Related
Commands :OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
:OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-76 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:NOISe
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:NOISe
[<amp>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum[,<offset>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum]]
Description Set the waveform of the specified channel to noise with the specified amplitude and
offset.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<amp> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 5Vpp
<offset> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 0VDC
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The range of <amp> is limited by the “Impedance” (:OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
or :OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD) setting. The range of <offset> is limited by the
“Impedance” and “Amplitude/High Level” settings.
Example :SOUR1:APPL:NOIS 1,2 /*Set the waveform of CH1 to noise with 1Vpp amplitude
and 2VDC offset*/
Related
Commands :OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
:OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:PULSe
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:PULSe
[<freq>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum[,<amp>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum
[,<offset>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum[,<phase>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum]]]]
Description Set the waveform of the specified channel to pulse with the specified frequency,
amplitude, offset and phase.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<freq> Real 1uHz to 25MHz 1kHz
<amp> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 5Vpp
<offset> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 0V
DC
<phase> Real 0° to 360° 0°
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The range of <amp> is limited by the “Impedance” (:OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
or :OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD) and “Frequency/Period” settings. The range of
<offset> is limited by the “Impedance” and “Amplitude/High Level” settings.
Example :SOUR1:APPL:PULS 100,3,2,1 /*Set the waveform of CH1 to pulse waveform with
100Hz frequency, 3Vpp amplitude, 2VDC offset
and 1° start phase*/
Related
Commands :OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
:OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-77
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:RAMP
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy: RAMP
[<freq>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum[,<amp>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum
[,<offset>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum[,<phase>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum]]]]
Description Set the waveform of the specified channel to ramp waveform with the specified
frequency, amplitude, offset and phase.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<freq> Real 1uHz to 1MHz 1kHz
<amp> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 5Vpp
<offset> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 0VDC
<phase> Real 0° to 360° 0°
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The range of <amp> is limited by the “Impedance” (:OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
or :OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD) and “Frequency/Period” settings. The range of <offset>
is limited by the “Impedance” and “Amplitude/High Level” settings.
Example :SOUR1:APPL:RAMP 100,1,2,3 /*Set the waveform of CH1 to ramp waveform with
100Hz frequency, 1Vpp amplitude, 2VDC offset
and 3° start phase*/
Related
Commands :OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
:OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-78 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:SINusoid
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:SINusoid
[<freq>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum[,<amp>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum
[,<offset>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum[,<phase>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum]]]]
Description Set the waveform of the specified channel to sine waveform with the specified
frequency, amplitude, offset and phase.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<freq> Real 1uHz to 60MHz 1kHz
<amp> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 5Vpp
<offset> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 0VDC
<phase> Real 0° to 360° 0°
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The range of <amp> is limited by the “Impedance” (:OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
or :OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD) and “Frequency/Period” settings. The range of
<offset> is limited by the “Impedance” and “Amplitude/High Level” settings.
Example :SOUR1:APPL:SIN 100,3,2,1 /*Set the waveform of CH1 to sine waveform with
100Hz frequency, 3Vpp amplitude, 2VDC offset and
1° start phase*/
Related
Commands :OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
:OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-79
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:SQUare
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:SQUare
[<freq>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum[,<amp>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum
[,<offset>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum[,<phase>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum]]]]
Description Set the waveform of the specified channel to square waveform with the specified
frequency, amplitude, offset and phase.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<freq> Real 1uHz to 25MHz 1kHz
<amp> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 5Vpp
<offset> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 0V
DC
<phase> Real 0° to 360° 0°
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The range of <amp> is limited by the “Impedance” (:OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
or :OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD) and “Frequency/Period” settings. The range of
<offset> is limited by the “Impedance” and “Amplitude/High Level” settings.
Example :SOUR1:APPL:SQU 100,1,2,3 /*Set the waveform of CH1 to square with 100Hz
frequency, 1Vpp amplitude, 2VDC offset and 3°
start phase*/
Related
Commands :OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
:OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-80 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:TRIangle
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:TRIangle
[<freq>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum[,<amp>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum
[,<offset>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum[,<phase>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum]]]]
Description Set the waveform of the specified channel to triangle waveform with the specified
frequency, amplitude, offset and phase.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<freq> Real 1uHz to 1MHz 1kHz
<amp> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 5Vpp
<offset> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 0VDC
<phase> Real 0° to 360° 0°
Explanation The triangle waveform is ramp waveform with 100% symmetry.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The range of <amp> is limited by the “Impedance” (:OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
or :OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD) and “Frequency/Period” settings. The range of
<offset> is limited by the “Impedance” and “Amplitude/High Level” settings.
Example :SOUR1:APPL:TRI 100,1,2,3 /*Set the waveform of CH1 to triangle waveform
with 100Hz frequency, 1Vpp amplitude, 2VDC offset
and 3° start phase*/
Related
Commands :OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
:OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-81
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:USER
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:USER
[<freq>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum[,<amp>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum
[,<offset>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum[,<phase>|DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum]]]]
Description Set the waveform of the specified channel to arbitrary waveform (in frequency output
mode) with the specified frequency, amplitude, offset and phase.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<freq> Real 1uHz to 20MHz 1kHz
<amp> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 5Vpp
<offset> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 0VDC
<phase> Real 0° to 360° 0°
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
This command only sets the arbitrary waveform parameters of the channel and
does not set the arbitrary waveform type. The default arbitrary waveform is Sinc.
You can send the [:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion[:SHAPe] command to set the
waveform of the specified channel to the desired arbitrary waveform.
The range of <amp> is limited by the “Impedance” (:OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
or :OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD) and “Frequency/Period” settings. The range of <offset>
is limited by the “Impedance” and “Amplitude/High Level” settings.
Example :SOUR1:APPL:USER 100,1,2,3 /*Set the waveform of CH1 to arbitrary waveform
(in frequency output mode) with 100Hz
frequency, 1Vpp amplitude, 2VDC offset and 3°
start phase*/
Related
Commands :OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
:OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-82 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SOURce:BURSt Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:GATE:POLarity
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:GATE:POLarity {NORMal|INVerted}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:GATE:POLarity?
Description Set the gate polarity of the gated burst of the specified channel to positive
(NORMal) or negative (INVerted).
Query the gate polarity of the gated burst of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{NORMal|INVerted} Discrete NORMal|INVerted NORMal
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The gate polarity is only applicable to the gated burst mode
([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:MODE). The signal generator controls the burst
output according to the level of the external signal (namely the gated signal)
inputted from the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the corresponding
channel at the rear panel.
Positive (NORMal): the gated signal is true (false) when the external signal
level is high (low); Negative (INVerted): the gated signal is true (false) when
the external signal level is low (high).
The signal generator outputs a continuous waveform when the gated signal is
“True”; the signal generator finishes the current waveform period and then
stops when the gated signal is “False”. For noise waveform, the instrument
stops immediately when the gated signal changes to “False”.
Return Format The query returns NORM or INV.
Example :SOUR1:BURS:GATE:POL NORM /*Set the gate polarity of the gated burst of
CH1 to positivel*/
:SOUR1:BURS:GATE:POL? /*Query the gate polarity of the gated burst of
CH1 and the query returns NORM*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:MODE
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-83
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:INTernal:PERiod
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:INTernal:PERiod {<period>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:INTernal:PERiod? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the internal burst period of the N cycle burst of the specified channel.
Query the internal burst period of the N cycle burst of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<period> Real 2.016 6us to 500s 10ms
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The burst period is only applicable to the N cycle burst mode
([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:MODE) in internal trigger and is defined as the time
from the start of a burst to the start of the next burst.
The relation of the burst period, waveform period (the period of the burst
function (such as sine and square)) and the number of cycles of bursts is as
follows.
2us+×≥
cyclewaveformburst
NPP
Wherein,
burst
P
——burst period;
waveform
P
——waveform period;
cycle
N
——number of cycles.
If the specified burst period is too small, the signal generator will increase it
automatically to ensure the output of the specified number of cycles.
Return Format The query returns the burst period in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 1.000000E-01 (the burst period is 0.1s).
Example :SOUR1:BURS:INT:PER 0.1 /*Set the internal burst period of the N cycle burst of
CH1 to 0.1s*/
:SOUR1:BURS:INT:PER? /*Query the internal burst period of the N cycle burst
of CH1 and the query returns 1.000000E-01*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:MODE
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-84 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:MODE
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:MODE {TRIGgered|INFinity|GATed}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:MODE?
Description Set the burst type of the specified channel to N cycle (TRIGgered), infinite
(INFinity) or gated (GATed).
Query the burst type of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{TRIGgered|INFinity|GATed} Discrete TRIGgered|INFinity|GATed TRIGgered
Explanation DG1000Z can output N cycle, infinite and gated bursts.
In the N cycle burst mode, the signal generator outputs waveform with the
specified number of cycles when receiving the trigger signal. The waveform
functions that support the N cycle burst include sine, square, ramp, pulse and
arbitrary waveform (except DC). For the N cycle burst, “Internal”, “External” or
“Manual” trigger source can be used. Besides, you can set the “Burst Period”
(internal trigger), “Delay”, “Trigger Input” (external trigger) and “Trigger
Output” (internal trigger and manual trigger).
The infinite burst is equivalent to setting the number of cycles of the waveform
to infinite. The signal generator outputs continuous waveform when receiving
the trigger signal. The waveform functions that support infinite burst include
sine, square, ramp, pulse and arbitrary waveform (except DC). For the infinite
burst, “External” or “Manual” trigger source can be used. Besides, you can set
the “Delay”, “Trigger Input” (external trigger) and “Trigger Output” (manual
trigger).
In the gated burst mode, the signal generator controls the waveform output
according to the level of the external signal inputted from the
[Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the corresponding channel at the rear
panel. The waveform functions that support the gated burst include sine,
square, ramp, pulse, noise and arbitrary waveform (except DC). For the gated
burst, only “External” trigger source can be used.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns TRIG, INF or GAT.
Example :SOUR1:BURS:MODE TRIG /*Set the burst type of CH1 to N cycle*/
:SOUR1:BURS:MODE? /*Query the burst type of CH1 and the query
returns TRIG*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-85
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:NCYCles
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:NCYCles {<cycles>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:NCYCles? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the number of cycles of the N cycle burst of the specified channel.
Query the number of cycles of the N cycle burst of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<cycles> Integer 1 to 1 000 000 (external or manual trigger)
1 to 500 000 (internal trigger) 1
Explanation In the N cycle burst mode ([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:MODE), the signal
generator outputs the waveform with the specified number of cycles when
receiving the trigger signal.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the number of cycles in scientific notation with 7 effective digits,
for example, 1.000000E+01 (the number of cycles is 10).
Example :SOUR1:BURS:NCYC 10 /*Set the number of cycles of the N cycle burst of CH1
to 10*/
:SOUR1:BURS:NCYC? /*Query the number of cycles of the N cycle burst of
CH1 and the query returns 1.000000E+01*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:MODE
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:PHASe
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:PHASe {<phase>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:PHASe? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the start phase of the burst function of the specified channel.
Query the start phase of the burst function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<phase> Real 0° to 360° 0°
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the start phase in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 1.000000E+01 (the start phase is 10°).
Example :SOUR1:BURS:PHAS 10 /*Set the start phase of the burst function of CH1 to
10°*/
:SOUR1:BURS:PHAS? /*Query the start phase of the burst function of CH1
and the query returns 1.000000E+01*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-86 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]?
Description Enable or disable the burst function of the specified channel.
Query the on/off status of the burst function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation DG1000Z can output the waveform with the specified number of cycles (namely
the burst) from a single channel or both of the two channels at the same time.
When the burst function is enabled (the backlight of Burst is illuminated), the
modulation or sweep function will be disabled automatically (if it is currently
enabled). At this point, the signal generator outputs the burst waveform from the
corresponding channel (if it is currently turned on) according to the current
configuration.
To avoid a large quantity of waveform changes, please enable the burst function
after configuring the other burst parameters.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :SOUR1:BURS ON /*Enable the burst function of CH1*/
:SOUR1:BURS? /*Query the on/off status of the burst function of CH1 and the
query returns ON*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-87
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TDELay
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TDELay {<delay>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TDELay? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the burst delay of the N cycle burst or infinite burst of the specified channel.
Query the burst delay of the N cycle burst or infinite burst of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<delay> Real Refer to the
“Explanation” 0s
Explanation The burst delay is only applicable to the N cycle burst and infinite burst modes
([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:MODE) and it refers to the time from when the signal
generator receives the trigger signal to when the instrument begins to output the
N cycle burst or infinite burst.
For the N cycle burst or infinite burst in the external trigger or manual trigger
mode ([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SOURce), the range of <delay> is 0s to
100s.
For the N cycle burst in the internal trigger mode, the range of <delay> is 0s to
(
2us−×−
cyclewaveformburst
NPP
) and it should be equal to or lower than 100s.
Wherein,
burst
P
——burst period;
waveform
P
——waveform period (namely the period of the burst function (such as
sine and square));
cycle
N
——number of the cycles of burst.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the burst delay in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 1.000000E-01 (the burst delay is 0.1s).
Example :SOUR1:BURS:TDEL 0.1 /*Set the burst delay of the N cycle burst or infinite burst
of CH1 to 0.1s*/
:SOUR1:BURS:TDEL? /*Query the burst delay of the N cycle burst or infinite
burst of CH1 and the query returns 1.000000E-01*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:MODE
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SOURce
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-88 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger[:IMMediate]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger[:IMMediate]
Description Trigger a burst output immediately on the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
Explanation This command is only applicable to the burst mode in manual trigger
([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SOURce). If the output of the
corresponding channel is not turned on (:OUTPut[<n>][:STATe]), the trigger
will be ignored.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system generates a trigger on
CH1 by default.
Example :SOUR1:BURS:TRIG /*Trigger a burst output immediately on CH1*/
Related
Commands :OUTPut[<n>][:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SLOPe
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SLOPe {POSitive|NEGative}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SLOPe?
Description Set the edge type of the trigger input signal in the burst mode of the specified
channel to rising edge (POSitive) or falling edge (NEGative).
Query the edge type of the trigger input signal in the burst mode of the specified
channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{POSitive|NEGative} Discrete POSitive|NEGative POSitive
Explanation This command is only applicable to the burst mode (N cycle, infinite or gated)
in external trigger ([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SOURce). When external
trigger is selected, the signal generator receives the trigger signal inputted
from the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the corresponding channel at
the rear panel and initiates a burst output each time a TTL pulse with the
specified polarity is received.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns POS or NEG.
Example :SOUR1:BURS:TRIG:SLOP NEG /*Set CH1 to trigger on the falling edge of the
trigger input signal*/
:SOUR1:BURS:TRIG:SLOP? /*Query the edge type of the trigger input
signal of CH1 and the query returns NEG*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SOURce
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-89
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SOURce
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SOURce {INTernal|EXTernal|MANual}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SOURce?
Description Set the trigger source of the burst mode of the specified channel to internal
(INTernal), external (EXTernal) or manual (MANual).
Query the trigger source of the burst mode of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{INTernal|EXTernal|MANual} Discrete INTernal|EXTernal|MANual INTernal
Explanation The trigger source of the burst can be internal, external or manual. The signal
generator initiates a burst output each time a trigger signal is received and then
waits for the next trigger signal.
Only the N cycle burst ([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:MODE) supports internal trigger.
When internal trigger is selected, the frequency of the N cycle burst is
determined by the “Burst Period” ([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:INTernal:PERiod).
You can also set the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the corresponding
channel at the rear panel to output trigger signal with the specified edge type
(rising edge or falling edge) or turn off the trigger signal output
([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:TRIGOut).
The N cycle, infinite and gated bursts all supports external trigger. When external
trigger is selected, the signal generator receives the trigger signal inputted from
the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector corresponding to the specified channel
at the rear panel and initiates a burst output each time a TTL pulse with the
specified polarity is received. You can specify the edge type of the trigger input
signal (rising edge or falling edge).
The N cycle and infinite bursts support manual trigger. When manual trigger is
selected and the output of the corresponding channel is turned on, the
instrument outputs N cycle burst or infinite burst when the
*TRG, :TRIGger[<n>][:IMMediate] or
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger[:IMMediate] command is sent. If the output of
the corresponding channel is not turned on, the trigger will be ignored. You can
also set the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the corresponding channel at
the rear panel to output trigger signal with the specified edge type (rising edge
or falling edge) or turn off the trigger signal output.
Return Format The query returns INT, EXT or MAN.
Example :SOUR1:BURS:TRIG:SOUR EXT /*Set the trigger source of the burst mode of CH1
to external*/
:SOUR1:BURS:TRIG:SOUR? /*Query the trigger source of the burst mode of
CH1 and the query returns EXT*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:INTernal:PERiod
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:MODE
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger[:IMMediate]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:TRIGOut
*TRG
:TRIGger[<n>][:IMMediate]
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-90 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:TRIGOut
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:TRIGOut {POSitive|NEGative|OFF}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:TRIGOut?
Description Set the edge type of the trigger output signal in the burst mode of the specified
channel to rising edge (POSitive) or falling edge (NEGative) or disable the trigger
output signal.
Query the type of the trigger output signal in the burst mode of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{POSitive|NEGative|OFF} Discrete POSitive|NEGative|OFF OFF
Explanation This command is applicable to the burst mode (N cycle, infinite or gated,
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:MODE) in internal or manual trigger
([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SOURce). When internal or manual trigger is
selected, you can set the instrument to output the trigger signal with the
specified edge (rising edge or falling edge) from the corresponding
[Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector at the rear panel or turn off the trigger
signal output.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns POS, NEG or OFF.
Example :SOUR:BURS:TRIG:TRIGO POS /*Set the edge type of the trigger output signal in
the burst mode of CH1 to rising edge*/
:SOUR:BURS:TRIG:TRIGO? /*Query the type of the trigger output signal in
the burst mode of CH1 and the query returns
POS*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:MODE
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SOURce
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-91
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:IDLE
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:IDLE {<idle>|FPT|TOP|CENTER|BOTTOM}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:IDLE?
Description Set the idle level position of the burst mode of the specified channel to the
first point (FirstPt), Top, Center, Bottom, or Diy.
Query the idle level position of the burst mode of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<idle> Integer 0 to 16383 FPT
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format Return FPT, TOP, CENTER, BOTTOM; or return the user-defined idle level
position in integer.
Example [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:IDLE FPT /*Set the idle level position of the
burst mode of CH1 to the first
point(FirstPt)*/
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:IDLE? /*Query the idle level position of the
burst mode of CH1, return FPT*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-92 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SOURce:FREQuency Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:CENTer
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:CENTer {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:CENTer? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the center frequency of the sweep function of the specified channel.
Query the center frequency of the sweep function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<frequency> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 550Hz
Explanation You can set the sweep boundaries via the center frequency and frequency span
([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:SPAN). The ranges of the center frequency and
frequency span of different sweep waveforms are different and the center
frequency and frequency span affect each other. Define the minimum frequency
of the current waveform as min
F, the maximum frequency as
max
F
,
2/)( maxmin FFFm+=
. The range of the center frequency (defined as
center
F
) is
min
Fto
max
F
. The range of the frequency span (defined as
span
F
) is affected by
the center frequency. When the center frequency is lower than m
F, the range of
the frequency span is
)(2 min
FFcenter −×±
; when the center frequency is greater
than m
F, the range of the frequency span is
)(2 max center
FF −×±
.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The start frequency, stop frequency, center frequency and frequency span fulfills
the following relation.
|)(|
stopstartcenter
FFF +=
;
|)(|
startstopspan
FFF −=
Wherein,
center
F
——center frequency;
span
F
——frequency span;
start
F
——start frequency;
stop
F
——stop frequency.
After the “Center Frequency” is modified, the signal generator will output the
sweep waveform from the specified “Start Frequency”. In large-scale sweep, the
amplitude characteristic of the output signal might change.
Return Format The query returns the center frequency in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 5.000000E+02 (the center frequency is 500Hz).
Example :SOUR1:FREQ:CENT 500 /*Set the center frequency of the sweep function of CH1
to 500Hz*/
:SOUR1:FREQ:CENT? /*Query the center frequency of the sweep function of
CH1 and the query returns 5.000000E+02*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:SPAN
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-93
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:MODE
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:MODE {OFFSet|RATio}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:MODE?
Description Set the frequency coupling mode to frequency deviation (OFFSet) or frequency ratio
(RATio).
Query the frequency coupling mode.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{OFFSet|RATio} Discrete OFFSet|RATio RATio
Explanation Frequency deviation mode: the frequencies of CH1 and CH2 fulfills certain
deviation relation: FCH2=FCH1+FDev (the reference source is CH1); FCH1=FCH2-FDev
(the reference source is CH2). Wherein, FCH1 is the frequency of CH1, FCH2 is the
frequency of CH2 and FDev is the specified frequency deviation.
Frequency ratio mode: the frequencies of CH1 and CH2 fulfills certain ratio
relation: FCH2=FCH1*FRatio (the reference source is CH1); FCH1=FCH2/FRatio (the
reference source is CH2). Wherein, FCH1 is the frequency of CH1, FCH2 is the
frequency of CH2 and FRatio is the specified frequency ratio.
After the frequency coupling, the instrument will adjust the frequency upper
limit or lower limit of the other channel to avoid parameter overrange when the
frequency of any of CH1 and CH2 exceeds the frequency upper limit or lower
limit of the channel.
Please select the desired frequency coupling mode and set the corresponding
frequency deviation ([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:OFFSet) or
frequency ration ([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:RATio) before enabling
the frequency coupling function
([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle[:STATe]). You cannot set the frequency
coupling mode and the frequency deviation/ratio after the frequency coupling
function is enabled.
You can also send the :COUPling:FREQuency:MODE command to set and query
the frequency coupling mode.
Return Format The query returns OFFSET or RATIO.
Example :FREQ:COUP:MODE OFFS /*Set the frequency coupling mode to frequency
deviation*/
:FREQ:COUP:MODE? /*Query the frequency coupling mode and the query
returns OFFSET*/
Related
Commands :COUPling:FREQuency:MODE
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:OFFSet
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:RATio
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle[:STATe]
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-94 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:OFFSet
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:OFFSet <frequency>
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:OFFSet?
Description Set the frequency deviation in the frequency coupling.
Query the frequency deviation in the frequency coupling.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<frequency> Real -59.999 999 999 999MHz to
59.999 999 999 999MHz 0
Explanation Please select the desired frequency coupling mode
([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:MODE) and set the corresponding
frequency deviation or frequency ration
([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:RATio) before enabling the frequency
coupling function ([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle[:STATe]). You cannot
set the frequency coupling mode and the frequency deviation/ratio after the
frequency coupling function is enabled.
When the frequency coupling function is disabled, sending this command can set
the frequency deviation if the current frequency coupling mode is frequency
deviation; sending this command can select the frequency deviation coupling
mode and set the frequency deviation if the current frequency coupling mode is
frequency ratio.
You can also send the :COUPling:FREQuency:DEViation command to set and
query the frequency deviation in the frequency coupling of the specified
channel.
Return Format The query returns the frequency deviation in scientific notation with 7 effective digits,
for example, 1.000000E+02 (the frequency deviation in the frequency coupling is
100Hz).
Example :FREQ:COUP:OFFS 100 /*Set the frequency deviation in the frequency coupling
to 100Hz*/
:FREQ:COUP:OFFS? /*Query the frequency deviation in the frequency
coupling and the query returns 1.000000E+02*/
Related
Commands :COUPling:FREQuency:DEViation
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:MODE
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:RATio
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle[:STATe]
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-95
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:RATio
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:RATio <ratio>
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:RATio?
Description Set the frequency ratio in the frequency coupling.
Query the frequency ratio in the frequency coupling.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<ratio> Real 0.000 001 to 1 000 000 1
Explanation Please select the desired frequency coupling mode
([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:MODE) and set the corresponding
frequency deviation ([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:OFFSet) or
frequency ration before enabling the frequency coupling function
([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle[:STATe]). You cannot set the frequency
coupling mode and the frequency deviation/ratio after the frequency coupling
function is enabled.
When the frequency coupling function is disabled, sending this command can set
the frequency ratio if the current frequency coupling mode is frequency ratio;
sending this command can select the frequency ratio coupling mode and set the
frequency ratio if the current frequency coupling mode is frequency deviation.
You can also send the :COUPling:FREQuency:RATio command to set and query
the frequency ratio in the frequency coupling of the specified channel.
Return Format The query returns the frequency ratio in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 1.001230E+02 (the frequency ratio in the frequency coupling is 100.123).
Example :FREQ:COUP:RAT 100.123 /*Set the frequency ratio in the frequency coupling to
100.123*/
:FREQ:COUP:RAT? /*Query the frequency ratio in the frequency coupling
and the query returns 1.001230E+02*/
Related
Commands :COUPling:FREQuency:RATio
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:MODE
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:OFFSet
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle[:STATe]
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-96 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle[:STATe]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle[:STATe]?
Description Turn on or off the frequency coupling function.
Query the on/off status the frequency coupling function.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation When the frequency coupling function is turned off, you can select the frequency
coupling mode and set the corresponding frequency deviation or ratio. After the
frequency coupling function is turned on, CH1 and CH2 are the reference source
of each other; when the frequency of one channel (this channel is the reference
source) is changed, the frequency of the other channel will be adjusted
automatically and the channel will always keep the specified frequency deviation
or ratio with the reference channel.
Please select the desired frequency coupling mode
([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:MODE) and set the corresponding
frequency deviation ([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:OFFSet) or frequency
ration ([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:RATio) before enabling the
frequency coupling function. You cannot set the frequency coupling mode and
the frequency deviation/ratio after the frequency coupling function is enabled.
You can also send the :COUPling:FREQuency[:STATe] command to set or query
the status of the frequency coupling function.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :FREQ:COUP ON /*Turn on the frequency coupling function */
:FREQ:COUP? /*Query the on/off status the frequency coupling function and
the query returns ON*/
Related
Commands :COUPling:FREQuency[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:MODE
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:OFFSet
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:RATio
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-97
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency[:FIXed]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency[:FIXed] {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency[:FIXed]? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the frequency of the waveform (basic waveforms and arbitrary waveform) of
the specified channel.
Query the frequency of the waveform (basic waveforms and arbitrary waveform) of
the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<frequency> Real Refer to Table 2-1
1kHz
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
If the frequency value in the command is greater than the corresponding
frequency upper limit or lower than the corresponding frequency lower limit,
the waveform frequency of the specified channel will be set to the frequency
upper limit or lower limit.
When the waveform type of the specified channel is changed, the instrument
still uses the frequency if the frequency is valid for the new waveform type; the
instrument will display prompt message and set the frequency to the
frequency upper limit of the new waveform type automatically if the frequency
is invalid for the new waveform type.
Return Format The query returns the waveform frequency in scientific notation with 7 effective
digits, for example, 1.000000E+02 (the waveform frequency is 100Hz).
Example :SOUR1:FREQ 100 /*Set the waveform frequency of CH1 to 100Hz*/
:SOUR1:FREQ? /*Query the waveform frequency of CH1 and the query
returns 1.000000E+02*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-98 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:SPAN
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:SPAN {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:SPAN? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the frequency span of the sweep function of the specified channel.
Query the frequency span of the sweep function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<frequency> Real The frequency range of the
current waveform of the
specified channel 900Hz
Explanation You can set the sweep boundaries via the center frequency and frequency
span ([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:SPAN). The ranges of the center
frequency and frequency span of different sweep waveforms are different and
the center frequency and frequency span affect each other. Define the
minimum frequency of the current waveform as min
F, the maximum frequency
as
max
F
,
2/)(
maxmin
FFF
m
+=
. The range of the center frequency (defined as
center
F
) is min
F
to
max
F
. The range of the frequency span (defined as
span
F
)
is affected by the center frequency. When the center frequency is lower than
m
F
, the range of the frequency span is
)(2
min
FF
center
−×±
; when the center
frequency is greater than m
F, the range of the frequency span is
)(2 max center
FF −×±
.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The start frequency, stop frequency, center frequency and frequency span
fulfills the following relation.
|)(|
stopstartcenter
FFF +=
;
|)(| startstopspan FFF −=
Wherein,
center
F
——center frequency;
span
F
——frequency span;
start
F
——start frequency;
stop
F
——stop frequency.
After the “Frequency Span” is modified, the signal generator will output the
sweep waveform from the specified “Start Frequency”. In large-scale sweep,
the amplitude characteristic of the output signal might change.
Return Format The query returns the frequency span in scientific notation with 7 effective digits,
for example, 8.000000E+02 (the frequency span is 800Hz).
Example :SOUR1:FREQ:SPAN 800 /*Set the frequency span of the sweep function of
CH1 to 800Hz*/
:SOUR1:FREQ:SPAN
? /*Query the frequency span of the sweep function of
CH1 and the query returns 8.000000E+02*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:CENTer
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-99
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the start frequency of the sweep function of the specified channel.
Query the start frequency of the sweep function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<frequency> Real The frequency range of the
current waveform of the
specified channel 100Hz
Explanation The start frequency and stop frequency ([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STOP) is
the frequency upper limit and lower limit of the frequency sweep. The signal
generator always sweeps from the start frequency to the stop frequency and
then returns to the start frequency. When the start frequency is lower than the
stop frequency, the signal generator sweeps from low frequency to high
frequency; when the start frequency is greater than the stop frequency, the
signal generator sweeps from high frequency to low frequency; when the start
frequency is equal to the stop frequency, the signal generator outputs at the
fixed frequency.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The sine, square, ramp and arbitrary waveform (except DC) can generate sweep
output and the range of the start frequency <frequency> differs for different
sweep waveform.
The start frequency, stop frequency, center frequency and frequency span fulfills
the following relation.
|)(|
stopstartcenter
FFF +=
;
|)(| startstopspan FFF −=
Wherein,
center
F
——center frequency;
span
F
——frequency span;
start
F
——start frequency;
stop
F
——stop frequency.
After the “Start Frequency” is modified, the signal generator will output the
sweep waveform from the specified “Start Frequency”. In large-scale sweep, the
amplitude characteristic of the output signal might change.
Return Format The query returns the start frequency in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 1.000000E+02 (the start frequency is 100Hz).
Example :SOUR1:FREQ:STAR 100 /*Set the start frequency of the sweep function of CH1
to 100Hz*/
:SOUR1:FREQ:STAR? /*Query the start frequency of the sweep function of
CH1 and the query returns 1.000000E+02*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STOP
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-100 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STOP
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STOP {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STOP? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the stop frequency of the sweep function of the specified channel.
Query the stop frequency of the sweep function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<frequency> Real The frequency range of the
current waveform of the
specified channel 1kHz
Explanation The start frequency ([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt) and stop frequency
is the frequency upper limit and lower limit of the frequency sweep. The signal
generator always sweeps from the start frequency to the stop frequency and
then returns to the start frequency. When the start frequency is lower than the
stop frequency, the signal generator sweeps from low frequency to high
frequency; when the start frequency is greater than the stop frequency, the
signal generator sweeps from high frequency to low frequency; when the start
frequency is equal to the stop frequency, the signal generator outputs at the
fixed frequency.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The sine, square, ramp and arbitrary waveform (except DC) can generate
sweep output and the range of the stop frequency <frequency> differs for
different sweep waveform.
The start frequency, stop frequency, center frequency and frequency span
fulfills the following relation.
|)(|
stopstartcenter
FFF +=
;
|)(| startstopspan FFF −=
Wherein,
center
F
——center frequency;
span
F
——frequency span;
start
F
——start frequency;
stop
F
——stop frequency.
After the “Stop Frequency” is modified, the signal generator will output the
sweep waveform from the specified “Start Frequency”. In large-scale sweep,
the amplitude characteristic of the output signal might change.
Return Format The query returns the stop frequency in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 9.000000E+02 (the stop frequency is 900Hz).
Example :SOUR1:FREQ:STOP 900 /*Set the stop frequency of the sweep function of CH1
to 900Hz*/
:SOUR1:FREQ:STOP? /*Query the stop frequency of the sweep function of
CH1 and the query returns 9.000000E+02*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-101
:SOURce:FUNCtion Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:ARBitrary:MODE
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:ARBitrary:MODE {FREQ|SRATe}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:ARBitrary:MODE?
Description Set the arbitrary waveform output mode of the specified channel to frequency
(FERQ) or sample rate (SRATe) output mode.
Query the arbitrary waveform output mode of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{FERQ|SRATe} Discrete FREQ|SRATe FERQ
Explanation DG1000Z supports two output modes: frequency output mode and sample
rate output mode.
In the frequency output mode, users can set the output frequency or period of
the arbitrary waveform but cannot set the sample rate. The instrument
outputs the arbitrary waveform made up of certain points selected according
to the current output frequency.
In the sample rate output mode, users can set the sample rate (namely
number of points outputted per second) but cannot set the frequency or
period. The instrument outputs the arbitrary waveform point by point
according to the current sample rate.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns FERQ or SRATE.
Example :SOUR1:FUNC:ARB:MODE FREQ /*Set the arbitrary waveform output mode of
CH1 to frequency output*/
:SOUR1:FUNC:ARB:MODE? /*Query the arbitrary waveform output mode
of CH1 and the query returns FERQ*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-102 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:ARBitrary:SRATe
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:ARBitrary:SRATe {<srate>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:ARBitrary:SRATe? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the sample rate of the arbitrary waveform of the specified channel.
Query the sample rate of the arbitrary waveform of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<srate> Real 1uSa/s to 60MSa/s 20MSa/s
Explanation The sample rate is the number of points outputted per second. The instrument
outputs the arbitrary waveform point by point according to the current sample
rate.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the sample rate of the arbitrary waveform in scientific notation with
7 effective digits, for example, 1.000000E+02 (the sample rate of the arbitrary
waveform is 100Sa/s)
Example :SOUR1:FUNC:ARB:SRAT 100 /*Set the sample rate of the arbitrary waveform of
CH1 to 100Sa/s*/
:SOUR1:FUNC:ARB:SRAT? /*Query the sample rate of the arbitrary waveform
of CH1 and the query returns 1.000000E+02*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-103
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:DCYCle
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:DCYCle {<percent>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:DCYCle? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the pulse duty cycle of the specified channel.
Query the pulse duty cycle of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<percent> Discrete 0.001% to 99.999% 50%
Explanation The pulse duty cycle is defined as the percentage that the pulse width
([:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:WIDTh) takes up in the pulse period
([:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:PERiod).
The range of the pulse duty cycle is limited by the “minimum pulse width” and
“pulse period” (for the ranges of the “minimum pulse width” and “pulse period”,
please refer to the “Signal Characteristics” of the “Specifications” in
DG1000Z
User’s Guide
). The actual range of the pulse duty cycle is
)21(100100
minmin pulsewdcyclepulsew
PPPPP ÷×−×<≤÷×
Wherein,
dcycle
P
——pulse duty cycle;
minw
P
——minimum pulse width;
pulse
P
——pulse period.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the pulse duty cycle in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 4.500000E+01 (the pulse duty cycle is 45%).
Example :SOUR1:FUNC:PULS:DCYC 45 /*Set the pulse duty cycle of CH1 to 45%*/
:SOUR1:FUNC:PULS:DCYC? /*Query the pulse duty cycle of CH1 and the query
returns 4.500000E+01*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:PERiod
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:WIDTh
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-104 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:HOLD
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:HOLD {WIDTh|DCYCle}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:HOLD?
Description Set the highlighted item of the specified channel to pulse width (WIDTh) or pulse
duty cycle (DCYCle).
Query the item (pulse width or pulse duty cycle) highlighted of the specified
channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{WIDTh|DCYCle} Discrete WIDTh|DCYCle DCYCle
Return Format The query returns WIDT or DUTY.
Example :SOUR1:FUNC:PULS:HOLD WIDT /*Set the highlighted item of CH1 to pulse
width*/
:SOUR1:FUNC:PULS:HOLD? /*Query the item (pulse width or pulse duty
cycle) highlighted of CH1 and the query
returns WIDT*/
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:PERiod
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:PERiod {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:PERiod? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the pulse period of the specified channel.
Query the pulse period of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<seconds> Real 40ns to 1Ms (DG1062Z)
66.6ns to 1Ms (DG1032Z) 1ms
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
When the waveform type of the specified channel is changed
([:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy?), the instrument still uses the period if the period is
valid for the new waveform type; the instrument displays prompt message and
sets the period to the period lower limit of the new waveform type automatically
if the period is invalid for the new waveform type.
Return Format The query returns the pulse period in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 1.000000E-01 (the pulse period is 0.1s).
Example :SOUR1:FUNC:PULS:PER 0.1 /*Set the pulse period of CH1 to 0.1s*/
:SOUR1:FUNC:PULS:PER? /*Query the pulse period of CH1 and the query
returns 1.000000E-01*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy?
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-105
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:TRANsition[:BOTH]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:TRANsition[:BOTH]
{<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Description Set the pulse rise time and fall time of the specified channel to the same specified
value.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<seconds> Real 10ns to 0.625×pulse width 20ns
Explanation The rise time is defined as the time required for the pulse amplitude to rise
from 10％ to 90％; the fall time is defined as the time required for the pulse
amplitude to fall from 90％ to 10％.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The ranges of the rise time and fall time are limited by the current waveform
frequency and pulse width. When the specified value exceeds the limits, the
instrument will adjust the edge time automatically to make it match the
specified pulse width.
Example :SOUR1:FUNC:PULS:TRAN 0.000000035 /*Set the pulse rise time and fall time
of CH1 to 35ns*/
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:TRANsition:LEADing
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:TRANsition:LEADing
{<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:TRANsition:LEADing? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the pulse rise time of the specified channel.
Query the pulse rise time of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<seconds> Real 10ns to 0.625×pulse width 20ns
Explanation The rise time is defined as the time required for the pulse amplitude to rise
from 10％ to 90％.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The range of the rise time is limited by the current waveform frequency and
pulse width. When the specified value exceeds the limits, DG1000Z will adjust
the edge time automatically to make it match the specified pulse width.
Return Format The query returns the pulse rise time in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 3.500000E-08 (the pulse rise time is 35ns).
Example :SOUR1:FUNC:PULS:TRAN:LEAD 0.000000035 /*Set the pulse rise time of CH1 to
35ns*/
:SOUR1:FUNC:PULS:TRAN:LEAD? /*Query the pulse rise time of CH1 and
the query returns 3.500000E-08*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-106 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:TRANsition:TRAiling
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:TRANsition:TRAiling
{<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:TRANsition:TRAiling? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the pulse fall time of the specified channel.
Query the pulse fall time of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<seconds> Real 10ns to 0.625×pulse width 20ns
Explanation The fall time is defined as the time required for the pulse amplitude to fall from
90％ to 10％.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The range of the fall time is limited by the current waveform frequency and pulse
width. When the specified value exceeds the limits, DG1000Z will adjust the edge
time automatically to make it match the specified pulse width.
Return Format The query returns the pulse fall time in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 3.500000E-08 (the pulse fall time is 35ns).
Example :SOUR1:FUNC:PULS:TRAN:TRA 0.000000035 /*Set the pulse fall time of CH1 to
35ns*/
:SOUR1:FUNC:PULS:TRAN:TRA? /*Query the pulse fall time of CH1
and the query returns
3.500000E-08*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-107
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:WIDTh
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:WIDTh {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:WIDTh? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the pulse width of the specified channel.
Query the pulse width of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<seconds> Real 16ns to 999.999 982 118 590 6ks 500us
Explanation The pulse width is defined as the time interval between 50% of the amplitude of
a pulse rising edge to 50% of the amplitude of the next pulse falling edge.
The range of the pulse width is limited by the “minimum pulse width” and “pulse
period” (for the ranges of the “minimum pulse width” and “pulse period”, please
refer to the “Signal Characteristics” of the “Specifications” in
DG1000Z User’s
Guide
). The actual range of the pulse width is
minmin
2
wpulsewidthw
PPPP ×−<≤
Wherein,
width
P
——pulse width;
minw
P
——minimum pulse width;
pulse
P
——pulse period.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the pulse width in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 1.000000E-02 (the pulse width is 10ms, namely 0.01s).
Example :SOUR1:FUNC:PULS:WIDT 0.01 /*Set the pulse width of CH1 to 10ms (namely
0.01s)*/
:SOUR1:FUNC:PULS:WIDT? /*Query the pulse width of CH1 and the query
returns 1.000000E-02*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-108 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry {<symmetry>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the ramp symmetry of the specified channel.
Query the ramp symmetry of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<symmetry> Real 0% to 100% 50%
Explanation The symmetry is defined as the percentage that the rising period of the ramp
waveform takes up in the period.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the symmetry in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 5.500000E+01 (the ramp symmetry is 55%).
Example :SOUR1:FUNC:RAMP:SYMM 55 /*Set the ramp symmetry of CH1 to 55%*/
:SOUR1:FUNC:RAMP:SYMM? /*Query the ramp symmetry of CH1 and the query
returns 5.500000E+01*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-109
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion[:SHAPe] <name>
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]?
Description Set the waveform type of the specified channel.
Query the waveform type of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<name> Discrete Refer to the “Explanation” None
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related parameters
of CH1 by default.
<name> can be various basic waveforms, harmonic waveform and arbitrary
waveform. Its range is
SINusoid|SQUare|RAMP|PULSe|NOISe|USER|HARMonic| DC|KAISER|
ROUNDPM|SINC|NEGRAMP|ATTALT|AMPALT|STAIRDN|STAIRUP|STAIRUD|CPULSE|
PPULSE|NPULSE|TRAPEZIA|ROUNDHALF|ABSSINE|ABSSINEHALF|SINETRA|
SINEVER|EXPRISE|EXPFALL|TAN|COT|SQRT|X2DATA|GAUSS|HAVERSINE|LORENTZ
|DIRICHLET|GAUSSPULSE|AIRY|CARDIAC|QUAKE|GAMMA|VOICE|TV|COMBIN|
BANDLIMITED|STEPRESP|BUTTERWORTH|CHEBYSHEV1|CHEBYSHEV2|BOXCAR|
BARLETT|TRIANG|BLACKMAN|HAMMING|HANNING|DUALTONE|ACOS|ACOSH|
ACOTCON|ACOTPRO|ACOTHCON|ACOTHPRO|ACSCCON|ACSCPRO|ACSCHCON|
ACSCHPRO|ASECCON|ASECPRO|ASECH|ASIN|ASINH|ATAN|ATANH|BESSELJ|
BESSELY|CAUCHY|COSH|COSINT|COTHCON|COTHPRO|CSCCON|CSCPRO|
CSCHCON|CSCHPRO|CUBIC|ERF|ERFC|ERFCINV|ERFINV|LAGUERRE|LAPLACE|
LEGEND|LOG|LOGNORMAL|MAXWELL|RAYLEIGH|RECIPCON|RECIPPRO|SECCON|
SECPRO|SECH|SINH|SININT|TANH|VERSIERA|WEIBULL|BARTHANN|BLACKMANH|
BOHMANWIN|CHEBWIN|FLATTOPWIN|NUTTALLWIN|PARZENWIN|TAYLORWIN|
TUKEYWIN|CWPUSLE|LFPULSE|LFMPULSE|EOG|EEG|EMG|PULSILOGRAM|TENS1|
TENS2|TENS3|SURGE|DAMPEDOSC|SWINGOSC|RADAR|THREEAM|THREEFM|
THREEPM|THREEPWM|THREEPFM|RESSPEED|MCNOSIE|PAHCUR|RIPPLE|
ISO76372TP1|ISO76372TP2A|ISO76372TP2B|ISO76372TP3A|ISO76372TP3B|
ISO76372TP4|ISO76372TP5A|ISO76372TP5B|ISO167502SP|ISO167502VR|SCR|
IGNITION|NIMHDISCHARGE|GATEVIBR.
Return
Format The query returns a string, for example, SQU.
Example :SOUR1:FUNC SQU /*Set the waveform type of CH1 to square*/
:SOUR1:FUNC? /*Query the waveform type of CH1 and the query returns SQU*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-110 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:DCYCle
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:DCYCle {<percent>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:DCYCle? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the square duty cycle of the specified channel.
Query the square duty cycle of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<percent> Real Limited by the waveform
frequency 50%
Explanation Duty cycle is defined as the percentage that the duration of the high level of the
square waveform takes up in the period.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the square duty cycle in scientific notation with 7 effective digits,
for example, 4.500000E+01 (the square duty cycle is 45%).
Example :SOUR1:FUNC:SQU:DCYC 45 /*Set the square duty cycle of CH1 to 45%*/
:SOUR1:FUNC:SQU:DCYC? /*Query the square duty cycle of CH1 and the
query returns 4.500000E+01*/
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:PERiod
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:PERiod {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:PERiod? [{MINimum|MAXimum}]
Description Set the square period of the specified channel.
Query the square period of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<seconds> Real 40ns to 1Ms (DG1062Z)
66.6ns to 1Ms (DG1032Z) 1ms
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
When the waveform type of the specified channel is changed
([:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy?), the instrument still uses the period if the period is
valid for the new waveform type; the instrument displays prompt message and
sets the period to the period lower limit of the new waveform type
automatically if the period is invalid for the new wavform type.
Return Format The query returns the square period in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 1.000000E+00 (the square period is 1s).
Example :SOUR1:FUNC:SQU:PER 1 /*Set the square period of CH1 to 1s*/
:SOUR1:FUNC:SQU:PER? /*Query the square period of CH1 and the query
returns 1.000000E+00*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy?
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-111
:SOURce:HARMonic Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:AMPL
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:AMPL <sn>,{<value>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:AMPL? <sn>[,MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the amplitude of the specified order of harmonic in the harmonic function of the
specified channel.
Query the amplitude of the specified order of harmonic in the harmonic function of
the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<sn> Integer 2 to 8 2
<value> Real 0Vpp to the amplitude upper limit of
the specified channel 1.264 7Vpp
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The amplitude upper limit of the specified channel is limited by the
“Impedance” (:OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance or :OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD) and
“frequency/period” ([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency[:FIXed] or
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PERiod[:FIXed]) settings.
Return Format The query returns the harmonic amplitude in scientific notation with 7 effective
digits, for example, 1.000000E+00 (the harmonic amplitude is 1Vpp).
Example :SOUR1:HARM:AMPL 5,1 /*Set the amplitude of the fifth order of harmonic of
CH1 to 1Vpp*/
:SOUR1:HARM:AMPL? 5 /*Query the amplitude of the fifth order of harmonic
of CH1 and the query returns 1.000000E+00*/
Related
Commands :OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
:OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency[:FIXed]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PERiod[:FIXed]
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-112 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:ORDEr
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:ORDEr {<value>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:ORDEr? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the highest order of harmonic that can be outputted in the harmonic function of
the specified channel.
Query the highest order of harmonic that can be outputted in the harmonic function
of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<value> Integer 2 to 8 2
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The range of the highest order of harmonic is limited by the maximum output
frequency of the instrument (defined as
maxout
F
) and the current fundamental
waveform frequency (defined as
fund
F
) . The actual range is the integers from
2 to (
fundout FF ÷
max
).
Return Format The query returns the highest order of harmonic in scientific notation with 7
effective digits, for example, 3.000000E+00 (the highest order of harmonic is 3).
Example :SOUR1:HARM:ORDE 3 /*Set the highest order of harmonic that can be
outputted of CH1 to 3*/
:SOUR1:HARM:ORDE? /*Query the highest order of harmonic that can be
outputted of CH1 and the query returns
3.000000E+00*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-113
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:PHASe
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:PHASe <sn>,{<value>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:PHASe? <sn>[,MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the phase of the specified order of harmonic in the harmonic function of the
specified channel.
Query the phase of the specified order of harmonic in the harmonic function of the
specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<sn> Integer 2 to 8 2
<value> Real 0° to 360° 0.000°
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related parameters
of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the harmonic phase in scientific notation with 7 effective digits,
for example, 1.000000E+01 (the harmonic phase is 10°).
Example :SOUR1:HARM:PHAS 5,10 /*Set the phase of the fifth order of harmonic of CH1
to 10°*/
:SOUR1:HARM:PHAS? 5 /*Query the phase of the fifth order of harmonic of
CH1 and the query returns 1.000000E+01*/
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]?
Description Turn on or off the harmonic function of the specified channel.
Query the on/off status of the harmonic function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation DG1000Z can be used as a harmonic waveform generator and can output
harmonic with the specified order ([:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:ORDEr),
amplitude ([:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:AMPL) and phase
([:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:PHASe).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :SOUR1:HARM ON /*Turn on the harmonic function of CH1*/
:SOUR1:HARM? /*Query the on/off status of the harmonic function of CH1
and the query returns ON*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:AMPL
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:ORDEr
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:PHASe
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-114 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:TYPe
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:TYPe {EVEN|ODD|ALL|USER}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:TYPe?
Description Set the harmonic type of the specified channel to even harmonic (EVEN), odd
harmonic (ODD), all harmonic (ALL) or user-defined harmonic (USER).
Query the harmonic type of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{EVEN|ODD|ALL|USER} Discrete EVEN|ODD|ALL|USER EVEN
Explanation Even harmonic (EVEN): the instrument outputs the fundamental waveform and
the even orders of harmonics.
Odd harmonic (ODD): the instrument outputs the fundamental waveform and
the odd orders of harmonics.
All harmonic (ALL): the instrument outputs the fundamental waveform and all
the orders of harmonics.
User-defined harmonic (USER): users can define the orders of the harmonics
outputted and the highest order is 8.
The output states of the 8 orders of harmonics are represented by 8-bit binary
data. The leftmost bit represents the fundamental waveform; it is fixed at X and
cannot be modified. The rest 7 bits correspond to the second order of harmonic
to the eighth order of harmonic from left to right. 1 denotes turning on the
output of the corresponding order of harmonic and 0 denotes turning off the
output of the corresponding order of harmonic. For example, set the 8-bit data to
X001 0001 which denotes outputting the fundamental waveform, forth order of
harmonic and eighth order of harmonic.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The harmonic actually outputted is limited by the highest order of harmonic
currently specified ([:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:ORDEr) and the harmonic type.
Return Format The query returns EVEN, ODD, ALL or USER.
Example :SOUR1:HARM:TYP ODD /*Set the harmonic type of CH1 to odd harmonic*/
:SOUR1:HARM:TYP? /*Query the harmonic type of CH1 and the query
returns ODD*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:ORDEr
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-115
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:USER
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:USER <user>
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:USER?
Description Set the user-defined harmonic output of the specified channel.
Query the user-defined harmonic output of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<user> ASCII string X0000000 to X11111111 X0000000
Explanation In the user-defined harmonic ([:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:TYPe), users can
define the orders of the harmonics to be outputted and the highest order is 8.
The output states of the 8 orders of harmonics are represented by 8-bit binary
data. The leftmost bit represents the fundamental waveform; it is fixed at X and
cannot be modified. The rest 7 bits correspond to the second order of harmonic
to the eighth order of harmonic from left to right. 1 denotes turning on the output
of the corresponding order of harmonic, 0 denotes turning off the output of the
corresponding order of harmonic. For example, set the 8-bit data to X001 0001
which denotes outputting the fundamental waveform, forth order of harmonic
and eighth order of harmonic.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns a string between X0000000 and X11111111. For example,
X0010001.
Example :SOUR1:HARM:USER X0010001 /*Set the user-defined harmonic of CH1 to output
the fundamental waveform, forth order of
harmonic and eighth order of harmonic*/
:SOUR1:HARM:USER? /*Query the user-defined harmonic output of CH1
and the query returns X0010001*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:TYPe
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-116 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SOURce:MARKer Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:MARKer:FREQuency
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:MARKer:FREQuency {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:MARKer:FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the mark frequency of the specified channel.
Query the mark frequency of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<frequency> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 550Hz
Explanation For step sweep (the sweep points determined by the start frequency, stop
frequency and number of steps are f1, f2, ……, fn, fn+1……), if the mark
frequency is one of the sweep point values, the sync signal is TTL high level at
the start of the sweep and will change to low level at the mark frequency point. If
the mark frequency is not any of the sweep point values, the sync signal will
change to low level at the sweep point which is closest to the mark frequency.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The range of <frequency> is limited by the “Start Frequency”
([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt) and “Stop Frequency”
([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STOP). It must be between the start frequency
and stop frequency.
After the “Mark Frequency” is modified, the signal generator will output the
sweep waveform from the specified “Start Frequency”.
Return Format The query returns the mark frequency in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 5.000000E+02 (the mark frequency is 500Hz).
Example :SOUR1:MARK:FREQ 500 /*Set the mark frequency of CH1 to 500Hz*/
:SOUR1:MARK:FREQ? /*Query the mark frequency of CH1 and the query
returns 5.000000E+02*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STOP
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-117
[:SOURce[<n>]]:MARKer[:STATe]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:MARKer[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:MARKer[:STATe]?
Description Enable or disable the frequency mark function of the specified channel.
Query the on/off status of the frequency mark function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation The sync signal outputted from the [CH1/Sync/Ext Mod/Trig/FSK]
connector corresponding to the specified channel at the rear panel always
changes from low level to high level at the start of each sweep. The sync signal
changes from high level to low level at the center frequency point when the
“Mark” function is disabled or at the specified mark frequency point when the
“Mark” function is enabled.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :SOUR1:MARK ON /*Enable the frequency mark function of CH1*/
:SOUR1:MARK? /*Query the on/off status of the frequency mark function of
CH1 and the query returns ON*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-118 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SOURce[:MOD]:AM Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM[:DEPTh]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM[:DEPTh] {<depth>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM[:DEPTh]? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the AM modulation depth of the specified channel.
Query the AM modulation depth of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<depth> Real 0% to 120% 100%
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Modulation depth expressed as a percentage indicates the amplitude variation
degree. In 0% modulation depth, the output amplitude is half of the carrier
waveform amplitude. In 100% modulation depth, the output amplitude is equal
to the carrier waveform amplitude. In greater than 100% modulation depth, the
output amplitude of the instrument would not exceed 10Vpp (50Ω load).
When external modulation source ([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:SOURce) is
selected, the output amplitude of the instrument is controlled by the ±5V signal
level of the [CH1/Sync/Ext Mod/Trig/FSK] connector of the corresponding
channel at the rear panel. For example, if the modulation depth is set to 100%,
the output amplitude will be the maximum when the modulating signal is +5V
and the minimum when the modulating signal is -5V.
Return Format The query returns the AM modulation depth in scientific notation with 7 effective
digits, for example, 5.000000E+01 (the AM modulation depth is 50%).
Example :SOUR1:AM 50 /*Set the AM modulation depth of CH1 to 50%*/
:SOUR1:AM? /*Query the AM modulation depth of CH1 and the query returns
5.000000E+01*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:SOURce
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-119
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:DSSC
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:DSSC {ON|1|OFF|0}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:DSSC?
Description Turn on or off the AM carrier waveform suppression function of the specified
channel.
Query the on/off status of the AM carrier waveform suppression function of the
specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation DG1000Z supports the normal amplitude modulation and double sideband
suppressed carrier (DSB-SC) amplitude modulation. In the normal amplitude
modulation, the modulated waveform contains the carrier waveform
components. As the carrier waveform components carry no information, the
modulation is less efficient. In order to improve the modulation efficiency, the
carrier waveform components are suppressed on the base of the normal
amplitude modulation. At this point, all the modulated waveform carry
information. This method is called double sideband suppressed carrier
modulation.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :SOUR1:AM:DSSC ON /*Turn on the AM carrier waveform suppression function
of CH1*/
:SOUR1:AM:DSSC? /*Query the on/off status of the AM carrier waveform
suppression function of CH1 and the query returns
ON*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-120 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency
{<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the AM modulation frequency of the specified channel.
Query the AM modulation frequency of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<frequency> Real 2mHz to 1MHz 100Hz
Explanation This command is only applicable to the internal modulation source
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:SOURce).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the AM modulation frequency in scientific notation with 7 effective
digits, for example, 1.500000E+02 (the AM modulation frequency is 150Hz).
Example :SOUR1:AM:INT:FREQ 150 /*Set the AM modulation frequency of CH1 to
150Hz*/
:SOUR1:AM:INT:FREQ? /*Query the AM modulation frequency of CH1 and
the query returns 1.500000E+02*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion <name>
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion?
Description Set the AM modulation waveform of the specified channel.
Query the AM modulation waveform of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<name> Discrete SINusoid|SQUare|TRIangle|
RAMP|NRAMp|NOISe|USER SINusoid
Explanation This command is only applicable to the internal modulation source.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
SQUare: 50％ duty cycle; TRIangle: 50％ symmetry; RAMP: 100％
symmetry; NRAMp: 0％ symmetry; USER: the arbitrary waveform selected of
the specified channel.
Return Format The query returns SIN, SQU, TRI, RAMP, NRAMP, NOIS or USER.
Example :SOUR1:AM:INT:FUNC SQU /*Set the AM modulation waveform of CH1 to
square*/
:SOUR1:AM:INT:FUNC? /*Query the AM modulation waveform of CH1 and
the query returns SQU*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-121
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:SOURce
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:SOURce {INTernal|EXTernal}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:SOURce?
Description Set the AM modulation source of the specified channel to internal (INTernal) or
external (EXTernal) modulation source.
Query the AM modulation source of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{INTernal|EXTernal} Discrete INTernal|EXTernal INTernal
Explanation DG1000Z can receive the modulation waveform from the internal or external
modulation source.
When internal modulation source is selected, the modulation waveform can be
SINusoid, SQUare, TRIangle, RAMP, NRAMp, NOISe or USER and the default is
SINusoid. NOISe can be used as modulation waveform but cannot be used as
carrier waveform.
When external modulation source is selected, the signal generator receives the
external modulating signal from the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the
corresponding channel at the rear panel. At this point, the amplitude of the
modulated waveform is controlled by the ±5 V signal level of the connector. For
example, if the modulation depth is set to 100%, the output amplitude will be
the maximum when the modulating signal is +5V and the minimum when the
modulating signal is -5V.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns INT or EXT.
Example :SOUR1:AM:SOUR EXT /*Set the AM modulation source of CH1 to external
modulation source*/
:SOUR1:AM:SOUR? /*Query the AM modulation source of CH1 and the query
returns EXT*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-122 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:STATe
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:STATe {ON|1|OFF|0}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:STATe?
Description Turn on or off the AM modulation function of the specified channel.
Query the on/off status of the AM modulation function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation AM (Amplitude Modulation): the amplitude of the carrier waveform changes with
the transient voltage of the modulating waveform.
The AM carrier waveform could be Sine, Square, Ramp or Arbitrary waveform
(except DC). The default is Sine. Pulse, Noise and DC in the arbitrary waveform
could not be used as carrier waveform. The different settings of various
parameters (such as the frequency, amplitude, offset and start phase) of the
carrier waveform will influence the AM modulated waveform.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
If the sweep function ([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe) or burst function
([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]) is currently enabled, it will be disabled
automatically when the modulation function is turned on.
If the harmonic function ([:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]) is currently
enabled, the modulation function cannot be turned on (namely the harmonic
cannot be modulated).
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :SOUR1:AM:STAT ON /*Turn on the AM modulation function of CH1*/
:SOUR1:AM:STAT? /*Query the on/off status of the AM modulation function of
CH1 and the query returns ON*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-123
:SOURce[:MOD]:ASKey Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:AMPLitude
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:AMPLitude {<amplitude>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:AMPLitude? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the ASK modulation amplitude of the specified channel.
Query the ASK modulation amplitude of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<amplitude> Real 0Vpp to 10Vpp (HighZ) 2Vpp
Explanation In ASK modulation, the signal generator shifts its output amplitude between
two preset amplitudes (the carrier amplitude and modulation amplitude).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the ASK modulation amplitude in scientific notation with 7
effective digits, for example, 1.000000E+00 (the ASK modulation amplitude is
1Vpp).
Example :SOUR1:ASK:AMPL 1 /*Set the ASK modulation amplitude of CH1 to 1Vpp*/
:SOUR1:ASK:AMPL? /*Query the ASK modulation amplitude of CH1 and the
query returns 1.000000E+00*/
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:INTernal[:RATE]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:INTernal[:RATE]
{<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:INTernal[:RATE]? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the ASK modulation rate of the specified channel.
Query the ASK modulation rate of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<frequency> Real 2mHz to 1MHz 100Hz
Explanation This command is only applicable to the internal modulation source. The ASK
modulation rate refers to the frequency at which the output amplitude “shifts”
between the carrier amplitude and modulation amplitude.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the ASK modulation rate in scientific notation with 7 effective
digits, for example, 1.500000E+02 (the ASK modulation rate is 150Hz).
Example :SOUR1:ASK:INT 150 /*Set the ASK modulation rate of CH1 to 150Hz*/
:SOUR1:ASK:INT? /*Query the ASK modulation rate of CH1 and the query
returns 1.500000E+02*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-124 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:POLarity
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:POLarity {POSitive|NEGative}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:POLarity?
Description Set the ASK modulation polarity of the specified channel to positive (POSitive) or
negative (NEGative).
Query the ASK modulation polarity of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{POSitive|NEGative} Discrete POSitive|NEGative POSitive
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
In internal modulation ([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:SOURce), the signal
generator would output the lower of the carrier amplitude and modulation
amplitude ([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:AMPLitude) when the modulating
waveform is logic low level and output the greater when the modulating
waveform is logic high level if the polarity is set to positive. The situation is the
opposite when the polarity is set to negative.
In external modulation ([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:SOURce), the signal
generator would output the lower of the carrier amplitude and modulation
amplitude ([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:AMPLitude) when the external input
signal is logic low level and output the greater when the external input signal is
logic high level if the polarity is set to positive. The situation is the opposite when
the polarity is set to negative.
Return Format The query returns POS or NEG.
Example :SOUR1:ASK:POL POS /*Set the ASK modulation polarity of CH1 to positive*/
:SOUR1:ASK:POL? /*Query the ASK modulation polarity of CH1 and the query
returns POS*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:AMPLitude
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:SOURce
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-125
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:SOURce
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:SOURce {INTernal|EXTernal}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:SOURce?
Description Set the ASK modulation source of the specified channel to internal (INTernal) or
external (EXTernal) modulation source.
Query the ASK modulation source of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{INTernal|EXTernal} Discrete INTernal|EXTernal INTernal
Explanation DG1000Z can receive the modulation waveform from the internal or external
modulation source.
When internal source is selected, the modulating waveform is set to square with
50% duty cycle, and the frequency at which the output amplitude “shifts”
between the carrier amplitude and modulation amplitude
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:AMPLitude) is determined by the modulation
rate.
When external source is selected, the signal generator receives the external
modulating signal from the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the
corresponding channel at the rear panel. For the connector, controlling ASK
modulation externally is different from controlling AM/FM/PM modulations
externally. In ASK modulation, you can set the modulation polarity
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:POLarity).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns INT or EXT.
Example :SOUR1:ASK:SOUR EXT /*Set the ASK modulation source of CH1 to external
modulation source*/
:SOUR1:ASK:SOUR? /*Query the ASK modulation source of CH1 and the
query returns EXT*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:AMPLitude
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:POLarity
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-126 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:STATe
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:STATe { ON|1|OFF|0}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:STATe?
Description Turn on or off the ASK modulation function of the specified channel.
Query the on/off status of the ASK modulation function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation ASK (Amplitude Shift Keying): the signal generator shifts the output amplitude
between two preset amplitudes (the carrier amplitude and modulation
amplitude).
The ASK carrier waveform could be Sine, Square, Ramp or Arbitrary waveform
(except DC). The default is Sine. Pulse, Noise and DC in the arbitrary waveform
could not be used as carrier waveform. The different settings of various
parameters (such as the frequency, amplitude, offset and start phase) of the
carrier waveform will influence the ASK modulated waveform.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
If the sweep function ([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe) or burst function
([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]) is currently enabled, it will be disabled
automatically when the modulation function is turned on.
If the harmonic function is currently enabled
([:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]), the modulation function cannot be
turned on (namely the harmonic cannot be modulated).
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :SOUR1:ASK:STAT ON /*Turn on the ASK modulation function of CH1*/
:SOUR1:ASK:STAT? /*Query the on/off status of the ASK modulation function
of CH1 and the query returns ON*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-127
:SOURce[:MOD]:FM Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM[:DEViation]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM[:DEViation] {<deviation>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM[:DEViation]? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the FM frequency deviation of the specified channel.
Query the FM frequency deviation of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<deviation> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 1kHz
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The frequency deviation is the deviation of the modulating waveform frequency
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:INTernal:FREQuency) relative to the carrier
frequency. The frequency deviation must be lower than or equal to the carrier
frequency. The sum of the frequency deviation and carrier frequency must be
lower than or equal to the sum of the current carrier frequency upper limit and
1kHz.
If Sine is currently selected as the carrier waveform, the carrier amplitude will be
limited at 2Vpp when the sum of the frequency deviation and carrier frequency is
greater than the current carrier frequency upper limit.
When external modulation source is selected
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:SOURce), the frequency deviation is controlled by
the ±5V signal level of the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the
corresponding channel at the rear panel. Positive signal level corresponds to
frequency increase and negative signal level corresponds to frequency decrease.
Lower level will generate less deviation. For example, if the frequency deviation is
set to 1kHz, +5V signal level corresponds to a 1kHz increase of frequency and
-5V signal level corresponds to a 1kHz decrease of frequency.
Return Format The query returns the frequency deviation in scientific notation with 7 effective digits,
for example, 1.000000E+02 (the frequency deviation is 100Hz).
Example :SOUR1:FM 100 /*Set the FM frequency deviation of CH1 to 100Hz*/
:SOUR1:FM? /*Query the FM frequency deviation of CH1 and the query
returns 1.000000E+02*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:INTernal:FREQuency
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:SOURce
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-128 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:INTernal:FREQuency
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:INTernal:FREQuency
{<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:INTernal:FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the FM modulation frequency of the specified channel.
Query the FM modulation frequency of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<frequency> Real 2mHz to 1MHz 100Hz
Explanation This command is only applicable to the internal modulation source
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:SOURce).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the FM modulation frequency in scientific notation with 7 effective
digits, for example, 1.500000E+02 (the FM modulation frequency is 150Hz).
Example :SOUR1:FM:INT:FREQ 150 /*Set the FM modulation frequency of CH1 to 150Hz*/
:SOUR1:FM:INT:FREQ? /*Query the FM modulation frequency of CH1 and the
query returns 1.500000E+02*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:SOURce
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-129
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion <name>
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion?
Description Set the FM modulation waveform of the specified channel.
Query the FM modulation waveform of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<name> Discrete SINusoid|SQUare|TRIangle|
RAMP|NRAMp|NOISe|USER SINusoid
Explanation This command is only applicable to the internal modulation source
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:SOURce).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
SQUare: 50％ duty cycle; TRIangle: 50％ symmetry; RAMP: 100％
symmetry; NRAMp: 0％ symmetry; USER: the arbitrary waveform selected of
the specified channel.
Return Format The query returns SIN, SQU, TRI, RAMP, NRAMP, NOIS or USER.
Example :SOUR1:FM:INT:FUNC SQU /*Set the FM modulation waveform of CH1 to
square*/
:SOUR1:FM:INT:FUNC? /*Query the FM modulation waveform of CH1 and
the query returns SQU*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:SOURce
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-130 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:SOURce
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:SOURce {INTernal|EXTernal}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:SOURce?
Description Set the FM modulation source of the specified channel to internal (INTernal) or
external (EXTernal) modulation source.
Query the FM modulation source of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{INTernal|EXTernal} Discrete INTernal|EXTernal INTernal
Explanation DG1000Z can receive the modulation waveform from the internal or external
modulation source.
When internal modulation source is selected, the modulation waveform can be
SINusoid, SQUare, TRIangle, RAMP, NRAMp, NOISe or USER and the default is
SINusoid. NOISe can be used as modulation waveform but cannot be used as
carrier waveform.
When external modulation source is selected, the signal generator receives the
external modulating signal from the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the
corresponding channel at the rear panel. At this point, the frequency deviation
of the modulated waveform is controlled by the ±5 V signal level of the
connector. For example, if the frequency deviation is set to 1kHz, +5V signal
level corresponds to a 1kHz increase of frequency and -5V signal level
corresponds to a 1kHz decrease of frequency.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns INT or EXT.
Example :SOUR1:FM:SOUR EXT /*Set the FM modulation source of CH1 to external
modulation source*/
:SOUR1:FM:SOUR? /*Query the FM modulation source of CH1 and the
query returns EXT*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-131
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:STATe
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:STATe {ON|1|OFF|0}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:STATe?
Description Turn on or off the FM modulation function of the specified channel.
Query the on/off status of the FM modulation function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation FM (Frequency Modulation): the frequency of the carrier waveform changes with
the transient voltage of the modulating waveform.
The FM carrier waveform could be Sine, Square, Ramp or Arbitrary waveform
(except DC). The default is Sine. Pulse, Noise and DC in the arbitrary waveform
could not be used as carrier waveform. The different settings of various
parameters (such as the frequency, amplitude, offset and start phase) of the
carrier waveform will influence the FM modulated waveform.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
If the sweep function ([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe) or burst function
([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]) is currently enabled, it will be disabled
automatically when the modulation function is turned on.
If the harmonic function is currently enabled
([:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]), the modulation function cannot be turned
on (namely the harmonic cannot be modulated).
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :SOUR1:FM:STAT ON /*Turn on the FM modulation function of CH1*/
:SOUR1:FM:STAT? /*Query the on/off status of the FM modulation function of
CH1 and the query returns ON*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-132 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SOURce[:MOD]:FSKey Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey[:FREQuency]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey[:FREQuency] {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey[:FREQuency]? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the FSK hop frequency of the specified channel.
Query the FSK hop frequency of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<frequency> Real Frequency range of the
specified channel 10kHz
Explanation In FSK modulation, the signal generator shifts the output frequency between
two preset frequencies (the carrier frequency and hop frequency).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the FSK hop frequency in scientific notation with 7 effective
digits, for example, 5.000000E+03 (the FSK hop frequency is 5kHz).
Example :SOUR1:FSK 5000 /*Set the FSK hop frequency of CH1 to 5kHz*/
:SOUR1:FSK? /*Query the FSK hop frequency of CH1 and the query
returns 5.000000E+03*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-133
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:INTernal:RATE
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:INTernal:RATE {<rate>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:INTernal:RATE? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the FSK modulation rate of the specified channel.
Query the FSK modulation rate of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<rate> Real 2mHz to 1MHz 100Hz
Explanation This command is only applicable to the internal modulation source
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:SOURce). The FSK modulation rate refers to the
frequency at which the output frequency “shifts” between the carrier frequency
and hop frequency ([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey[:FREQuency]).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the FSK modulation rate in scientific notation with 7 effective digits,
for example, 1.500000E+02 (the FSK modulation rate is 150Hz).
Example :SOUR1:FSK:INT:RATE 150 /*Set the FSK modulation rate of CH1 to 150Hz*/
:SOUR1:FSK:INT:RATE? /*Query the FSK modulation rate of CH1 and the
query returns 1.500000E+02*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey[:FREQuency]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:SOURce
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-134 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:POLarity
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:POLarity {POSitive|NEGative}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:POLarity?
Description Set the FSK modulation polarity of the specified channel to positive (POSitive) or
negative (NEGative).
Query the FSK modulation polarity of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{POSitive|NEGative} Discrete POSitive|NEGative POSitive
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
In internal modulation ([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:SOURce), the signal
generator would output the carrier frequency when the modulating waveform is
logic low level and output the hop frequency
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey[:FREQuency]) when the modulating waveform
is logic high level if the polarity is set to positive. The situation is the opposite
when the polarity is set to negative.
In external modulation ([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:SOURce), the signal
generator would output the carrier frequency when the external input signal is
logic low level and output the hop frequency when the external input signal is
logic high level if the polarity is set to positive. The situation is the opposite when
the polarity is set to negative.
Return Format The query returns POS or NEG.
Example :SOUR1:FSK:POL POS /*Set the FSK modulation polarity of CH1 to positive*/
:SOUR1:FSK:POL? /*Query the FSK modulation polarity of CH1 and the query
returns POS*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey[:FREQuency]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:SOURce
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-135
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:SOURce
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:SOURce {INTernal|EXTernal}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:SOURce?
Description Set the FSK modulation source of the specified channel to internal (INTernal) or
external (EXTernal) modulation source.
Query the FSK modulation source of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{INTernal|EXTernal} Discrete INTernal|EXTernal INTernal
Explanation DG1000Z can receive the modulation waveform from the internal or external
modulation source.
When internal source is selected, the modulating waveform is set to square with
50% duty cycle, and the frequency at which the output frequency “shifts”
between carrier frequency and hop frequency
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey[:FREQuency]) is determined by the modulation
rate ([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:INTernal:RATE).
When external source is selected, the signal generator receives the external
modulating signal from the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the
corresponding channel at the rear panel. For the connector, controlling FSK
modulation externally is different from controlling AM/FM/PM modulations
externally. In FSK modulation, you can set the modulation polarity
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:POLarity).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns INT or EXT.
Example :SOUR1:FSK:SOUR EXT /*Set the FSK modulation source of CH1 to external
modulation source*/
:SOUR1:FSK:SOUR? /*Query the FSK modulation source of CH1 and the
query returns EXT*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey[:FREQuency]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:INTernal:RATE
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:POLarity
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-136 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:STATe
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:STATe {ON|1|OFF|0}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:STATe?
Description Turn on or off the FSK modulation function of the specified channel.
Query the on/off status of the FSK modulation function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation FSK (Frequency Shift Keying): the signal generator shifts the output frequency
between two preset frequencies (the carrier frequency and hop frequency).
The FSK carrier waveform could be Sine, Square, Ramp or Arbitrary waveform
(except DC). The default is Sine. Pulse, Noise and DC in the arbitrary waveform
could not be used as carrier waveform. The different settings of various
parameters (such as the frequency, amplitude, offset and start phase) of the
carrier waveform will influence the FSK modulated waveform.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
If the sweep function ([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe) or burst function
([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]) is currently enabled, it will be disabled
automatically when the modulation function is turned on.
If the harmonic function is currently enabled
([:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]), the modulation function cannot be
turned on (the harmonic cannot be modulated).
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :SOUR1:FSK:STAT ON /*Turn on the FSK modulation function of CH1*/
:SOUR1:FSK:STAT? /*Query the on/off status of the FSK modulation function of
CH1 and the query returns ON*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-137
:SOURce[:MOD]:PM Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM[:DEViation]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM[:DEViation] {<deviation>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM[:DEViation]? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the PM phase deviation of the specified channel.
Query the PM phase deviation of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<deviation> Real 0° to 360° 90°
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Phase deviation is the deviation of the modulating waveform phase relative to the
carrier waveform phase.
When external modulation source is selected
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:SOURce), the phase deviation is controlled by the
±5V signal level from the corresponding [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector at
the rear panel. For example, if the phase deviation is set to 180°, +5V signal level
corresponds to a 180º phase variation. The lower the external signal level, the
less deviation would be generated.
Return Format The query returns the PM phase deviation in scientific notation with 7 effective digits,
for example, 5.000000E+01 (the PM phase deviation is 50°).
Example :SOUR1:PM 50 /*Set the PM phase deviation of CH1 to 50°*/
:SOUR1:PM? /*Query the PM phase deviation of CH1 and the query returns
5.000000E+01*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:SOURce
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-138 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:INTernal:FREQuency
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:INTernal:FREQuency
{<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:INTernal:FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the PM modulation frequency of the specified channel.
Query the PM modulation frequency of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<frequency> Real 2mHz to 1MHz 100Hz
Explanation This command is only applicable to the internal modulation source
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:SOURce).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the PM modulation frequency in scientific notation with 7 effective
digits, for example, 1.500000E+02 (the PM modulation frequency is 150Hz).
Example :SOUR1:PM:INT:FREQ 150 /*Set the PM modulation frequency of CH1 to 150Hz*/
:SOUR1:PM:INT:FREQ? /*Query the PM modulation frequency of CH1 and the
query returns 1.500000E+02*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:SOURce
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-139
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion <name>
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion?
Description Set the PM modulation waveform of the specified channel.
Query the PM modulation waveform of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<name> Discrete SINusoid|SQUare|TRIangle|
RAMP|NRAMp|NOISe|USER SINusoid
Explanation This command is only applicable to the internal modulation source
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:SOURce).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
SQUare: 50％ duty cycle; TRIangle: 50％ symmetry; RAMP: 100％ symmetry;
NRAMp: 0％ symmetry; USER: the arbitrary waveform selected of the specified
channel.
Return Format The query returns SIN, SQU, TRI, RAMP, NRAMP, NOIS or USER.
Example :SOUR1:PM:INT:FUNC SQU /*Set the PM modulation waveform of CH1 to
square*/
:SOUR1:PM:INT:FUNC? /*Query the PM modulation waveform of CH1 and
the query returns SQU*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:SOURce
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-140 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:SOURce
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:SOURce {INTernal|EXTernal}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:SOURce?
Description Set the PM modulation source of the specified channel to internal (INTernal) or
external (EXTernal) modulation source.
Query the PM modulation source of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{INTernal|EXTernal} Discrete INTernal|EXTernal INTernal
Explanation DG1000Z can receive the modulation waveform from the internal or external
modulation source.
When internal modulation source is selected, the modulation waveform can be
SINusoid, SQUare, TRIangle, RAMP, NRAMp, NOISe or USER and the default is
SINusoid. NOISe can be used as modulation waveform but cannot be used as
carrier waveform.
When external modulation source is selected, the signal generator receives the
external modulating signal from the corresponding [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync]
connector at the rear panel. At this point, the phase deviation of the
modulated waveform is controlled by the ±5 V signal level of the connector.
For example, if the phase deviation is set to 180°, +5V signal level
corresponds to a 180º phase variation. The lower the external signal level, the
less deviation would be generated.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns INT or EXT.
Example :SOUR1:PM:SOUR EXT /*Set the PM modulation source of CH1 to external
modulation source*/
:SOUR1:PM:SOUR? /*Query the FM modulation source of CH1 and the
query returns EXT*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-141
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:STATe
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:STATe {ON|1|OFF|0}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:STATe?
Description Turn on or off the PM modulation function of the specified channel.
Query the on/off status of the PM modulation function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation PM (Phase Modulation): the phase of the carrier waveform changes with the
transient voltage of the modulating waveform.
The PM carrier waveform could be Sine, Square, Ramp or Arbitrary waveform.
The default is Sine. Pulse, Noise and DC in the arbitrary waveform could not be
used as carrier waveform. The different settings of various parameters (such as
the frequency, amplitude and offset) of the carrier waveform will influence the
PM modulated waveform.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
If the sweep function ([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe) or burst function
([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]) is currently enabled, it will be disabled
automatically when the modulation function is turned on.
If the harmonic function is currently enabled
([:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]), the modulation function cannot be
turned on (the harmonic cannot be modulated).
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :SOUR1:PM:STAT ON /*Turn on the PM modulation function of CH1*/
:SOUR1:PM:STAT? /*Query the on/off status of the PM modulation function of
CH1 and the query returns ON*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-142 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SOURce[:MOD]:PSKey Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:INTernal:RATE
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:INTernal:RATE {<rate>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:INTernal:RATE? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the PSK modulation rate of the specified channel.
Query the PSK modulation rate of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<frequency> Real 2mHz to 1MHz 100Hz
Explanation This command is only applicable to the internal modulation source
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:SOURce). The PSK modulation rate refers to
the frequency at which the output phase “shifts” between the carrier phase and
modulation phase ([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:PHASe).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the PSK modulation rate in scientific notation with 7 effective
digits, for example, 1.500000E+02 (the FSK modulation rate is 150Hz).
Example :SOUR1:PSK:INT:RATE 150 /*Set the PSK modulation rate of CH1 to 150Hz*/
:SOUR1:PSK:INT:RATE? /*Query the PSK modulation rate of CH1 and the
query returns 1.500000E+02*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:PHASe
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:PHASe
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:PHASe {<phase>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:PHASe? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the PSK modulation phase of the specified channel.
Query the PSK modulation phase of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<phase> Real 0° to 360° 180°
Explanation In PSK modulation, the signal generator “shifts” the output phase between two
preset phases (the carrier phase and modulation phase).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the PSK modulation phase in scientific notation with 7 effective
digits, for example, 9.000000E+01 (the PSK modulation phase is 90°).
Example :SOUR1:PSK:PHAS 90 /*Set the PSK modulation phase of CH1 to 90°*/
:SOUR1:PSK:PHAS? /*Query the PSK modulation phase of CH1 and the
query returns 9.000000E+01*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-143
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:POLarity
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:POLarity {POSitive|NEGative}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:POLarity?
Description Set the PSK modulation polarity of the specified channel to positive (POSitive) or
negative (NEGative).
Query the PSK modulation polarity of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{POSitive|NEGative} Discrete POSitive|NEGative POSitive
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
In internal modulation ([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:SOURce), the signal
generator would output the carrier phase when the modulating waveform is logic
low level and output the modulation phase
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:PHASe) when the modulating waveform is logic
high level if the polarity is set to positive. The situation is the opposite when the
polarity is set to negative.
In external modulation ([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:SOURce), the signal
generator would output the carrier phase when the external input signal is logic
low level and output the modulation phase
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:PHASe) when the external input signal is logic
high level if the polarity is set to positive. The situation is the opposite when the
polarity is set to negative.
Return Format The query returns POS or NEG.
Example :SOUR1:PSK:POL POS /*Set the PSK modulation polarity of CH1 to positive*/
:SOUR1:PSK:POL? /*Query the PSK modulation polarity of CH1 and the query
returns POS*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:PHASe
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:SOURce
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-144 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:SOURce
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:SOURce {INTernal|EXTernal}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:SOURce?
Description Set the PSK modulation source of the specified channel to internal (INTernal) or
external (EXTernal) modulation source.
Query the PSK modulation source of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{INTernal|EXTernal} Discrete INTernal|EXTernal INTernal
Explanation DG1000Z can receive the modulation waveform from the internal or external
modulation source.
When internal source is selected, the modulating waveform is set to square with
50% duty cycle, and the frequency at which the output phase “shifts” between
carrier phase and modulation phase ([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:PHASe) is
determined by the modulation rate
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:INTernal:RATE).
When external source is selected, the generator receives the external modulating
signal from the corresponding [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector at the rear
panel. For the connector, controlling PSK modulation externally is different from
controlling AM/FM/PM modulations externally. In PSK modulation, you can set the
modulation polarity ([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:POLarity).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns INT or EXT.
Example :SOUR1:PSK:SOUR EXT /*Set the PSK modulation source of CH1 to external
modulation source*/
:SOUR1:PSK:SOUR? /*Query the PSK modulation source of CH1 and the query
returns EXT*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:INTernal:RATE
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:PHASe
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:POLarity
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-145
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:STATe
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:STATe {ON|1|OFF|0}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:STATe?
Description Turn on or off the PSK modulation function of the specified channel.
Query the on/off status of the PSK modulation function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation PSK (Phase Shift Keying): the signal generator shifts the output phase between
two preset phases (the carrier phase and modulation phase).
The PSK carrier waveform could be Sine, Square, Ramp or Arbitrary waveform
(except DC). The default is Sine. Pulse, Noise and DC in the arbitrary waveform
could not be used as carrier waveform. The different settings of various
parameters (such as the frequency, amplitude, offset and start phase) of the
carrier waveform will influence the PSK modulated waveform.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
If the sweep function ([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe) or burst function
([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]) is currently enabled, it will be disabled
automatically when the modulation function is turned on.
If the harmonic function is currently enabled
([:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]), the modulation function cannot be
turned on (the harmonic cannot be modulated).
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :SOUR1:PSK:STAT ON /*Turn on the PSK modulation function of CH1*/
:SOUR1:PSK:STAT? /*Query the on/off status of the PSK modulation function
of CH1 and the query returns ON */
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-146 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SOURce[:MOD]:PWM Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM[:DEViation]:DCYCle
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM[:DEViation]:DCYCle
{<percent>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM[:DEViation]:DCYCle? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the PWM duty cycle deviation of the specified channel.
Query the PWM duty cycle deviation of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<percent> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 20%
Explanation Duty cycle deviation represents the variation (in %) of the modulated waveform
duty cycle relative to the original pulse duty cycle.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The duty cycle deviation is limited by the minimum duty cycle and current edge
time. The duty cycle deviation cannot exceed the current pulse duty cycle.
If the “Duty Cycle” is currently selected in the pulse of the specified channel
([:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:HOLD), “Duty Dev” is displayed in the interface when
the PWM modulation function is enabled; if the “Pulse Width” is currently
selected in the pulse of the specified channel, “Width Dev” is displayed in the
interface when the PWM modulation function is enabled.
Return Format The query returns the PWM duty cycle deviation in scientific notation with 7 effective
digits, for example, 1.500000E+01 (the PWM duty cycle deviation is 15%).
Example :SOUR1:PWM:DCYC 15 /*Set the PWM duty cycle deviation of CH1 to 15%*/
:SOUR1:PWM:DCYC? /*Query the PWM duty cycle deviation of CH1 and the
query returns 1.500000E+01*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:HOLD
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-147
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM[:DEViation][:WIDTh]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM[:DEViation][:WIDTh]
{<deviation>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM[:DEViation][:WIDTh]? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the PWM width deviation of the specified channel.
Query the PWM width deviation of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<deviation> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 200us
Explanation Width deviation represents the variation of the modulated waveform pulse
width relative to the original pulse width.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The width deviation is limited by the minimum pulse width and current edge
time. The width deviation cannot exceed the current pulse width.
If the “Duty Cycle” is currently selected in the pulse of the specified channel
([:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:HOLD), “Duty Dev” is displayed in the interface
when the PWM modulation function is enabled; if the “Pulse Width” is currently
selected in the pulse of the specified channel, “Width Dev” is displayed in the
interface when the PWM modulation function is enabled.
Return Format The query returns the PWM width deviation in scientific notation with 7 effective
digits, for example, 1.000000E-04 (the PWM width deviation 100us, namely
0.0001s).
Example :SOUR1:PWM 0.0001 /*Set the PWM width deviation of CH1 to 100us (namely
0.0001s)*/
:SOUR1:PWM? /*Query the PWM width deviation of CH1 and the query
returns 1.000000E-04*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:HOLD
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-148 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:INTernal:FREQuency
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:INTernal:FREQuency
{<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:INTernal:FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the PWM modulation frequency of the specified channel.
Query the PWM modulation frequency of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<frequency> Real 2mHz to 1MHz 100Hz
Explanation This command is only applicable to the internal modulation source
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:SOURce).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the PWM modulation frequency in scientific notation with 7
effective digits, for example, 1.500000E+02 (the PWM modulation frequency is
150Hz).
Example :SOUR1:PWM:INT:FREQ 150 /*Set the PWM modulation frequency of CH1 to
150Hz*/
:SOUR1:PWM:INT:FREQ? /*Query the PWM modulation frequency of CH1 and
the query returns 1.500000E+02*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:SOURce
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-149
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion <name>
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion?
Description Set the PWM modulation waveform of the specified channel.
Query the PWM modulation waveform of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<name> Discrete SINusoid|SQUare|TRIangle|
RAMP|NRAMp|NOISe|USER SINusoid
Explanation This command is only applicable to the internal modulation source
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:SOURce).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
SQUare: 50％ duty cycle; TRIangle: 50％ symmetry; RAMP: 100％ symmetry;
NRAMp: 0％ symmetry; USER: the arbitrary waveform selected of the specified
channel.
Return Format The query returns SIN, SQU, TRI, RAMP, NRAMP, NOIS or USER.
Example :SOUR1:PWM:INT:FUNC SQU /*Set the PWM modulation waveform of CH1 to
square*/
:SOUR1:PWM:INT:FUNC? /*Query the PWM modulation waveform of CH1 and
the query returns SQU*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:SOURce
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-150 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:SOURce
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:SOURce {INTernal|EXTernal}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:SOURce?
Description Set the PWM modulation source of the specified channel to internal (INTernal) or
external (EXTernal) modulation source.
Query the PWM modulation source of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{INTernal|EXTernal} Discrete INTernal|EXTernal INTernal
Explanation DG1000Z can receive the modulation waveform from the internal or external
modulation source.
When internal modulation source is selected, the modulation waveform can be
SINusoid, SQUare, TRIangle, RAMP, NRAMp, NOISe or USER and the default is
SINusoid. NOISe can be used as modulation waveform but cannot be used as
carrier waveform.
When external modulation source is selected, the signal generator receives the
external modulating signal from the corresponding [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync]
connector at the rear panel. At this point, the width deviation
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM[:DEViation][:WIDTh]) or duty cycle deviation
([:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM[:DEViation]:DCYCle) of the modulated waveform
is controlled by the ±5 V signal level of the connector. For example, if the width
deviation is set to 10s, +5V signal level corresponds to a 10s width variation.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns INT or EXT.
Example :SOUR1:PWM:SOUR EXT /*Set the PWM modulation source of CH1 to external
modulation source*/
:SOUR1:PWM:SOUR? /*Query the PWM modulation source of CH1 and the
query returns EXT*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM[:DEViation]:DCYCle
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM[:DEViation][:WIDTh]
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-151
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:STATe
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:STATe {ON|1|OFF|0}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:STATe?
Description Turn on or off the PWM modulation function of the specified channel.
Query the on/off status of the PWM modulation function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation PWM (Pulse Width Modulation): the carrier pulse width changes with the
transient voltage of the modulating waveform.
The PWM carrier waveform can only be pulse and the PWM function can only be
turned on when the current waveform of the specified channel is pulse. The
different settings of various parameters (such as the frequency, amplitude, DC
offset, pulse width and duty cycle) of the carrier waveform will influence the
PWM modulated waveform.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
If the sweep function ([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe) or burst function
([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]) is currently enabled, it will be disabled
automatically when the modulation function is turned on.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example Assume that the current waveform of CH1 is pulse,
:SOUR1:PWM:STAT ON /*Turn on the PWM modulation function of CH1*/
:SOUR1:PWM:STAT? /*Query the on/off status of the PWM modulation function
of CH1 and the query returns ON*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-152 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SOURce:MOD Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:MOD[:STATe]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:MOD[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:MOD[:STATe]?
Description Turn on or off the modulation function of the specified channel.
Query the on/off status of the modulation function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
If the sweep function ([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe) or burst function
([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]) is currently enabled, it will be disabled
automatically when the modulation function is turned on.
If the harmonic function is currently enabled
([:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]), the modulation function cannot be turned
on (namely the harmonic cannot be modulated).
The modulation function is not available in the sample rate mode.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :SOUR1:MOD ON /*Turn on the modulation function of CH1*/
:SOUR1:MOD? /*Query the on/off status of the modulation function of CH1 and
the query returns ON*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-153
[:SOURce[<n>]]:MOD:TYPe
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:MOD:TYPe {AM|FM|PM|ASK|FSK|PSK|PWM}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:MOD:TYPe?
Description Set the modulation type of the specified channel.
Query the modulation type of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{AM|FM|PM|ASK|
FSK|PSK|PWM} Discrete AM|FM|PM|ASK|
FSK|PSK|PWM AM
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
AM (Amplitude Modulation): the amplitude of the carrier waveform changes
with the transient voltage of the modulating waveform.
FM (Frequency Modulation): the frequency of the carrier waveform changes
with the transient voltage of the modulating waveform.
PM (Phase Modulation): the phase of the carrier waveform changes with the
transient voltage of the modulating waveform.
ASK (Amplitude Shift Keying): the signal generator shifts the output amplitude
between two preset amplitudes (the carrier amplitude and modulation
amplitude).
FSK (Frequency Shift Keying): the signal generator shifts the output frequency
between two preset frequencies (the carrier frequency and hop frequency).
PSK (Phase Shift Keying): the signal generator shifts the output phase
between two preset phases (the carrier phase and modulation phase).
PWM (Pulse Width Modulation): the carrier pulse width changes with the
transient voltage of the modulating waveform.
Return Format The query returns AM, FM, PM, ASK, FSK, PSK or PWM.
Example :SOUR1:MOD:TYPE FM /*Set the modulation type of CH1 to FM*/
:SOUR1:MOD:TYPE? /*Query the modulation type of CH1 and the query
returns FM*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-154 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SOURce:PERiod Command
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PERiod[:FIXed]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:PERiod[:FIXed] {<period>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PERiod[:FIXed]? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the waveform period (basic waveforms and arbitrary waveform) of the specified
channel.
Query the waveform period (basic waveforms and arbitrary waveform) of the
specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<period> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 1ms
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The period and frequency are the reciprocal of each other. For the frequency
ranges of different models and different waveforms of DG1000Z series, refer to
Table 2-1.
If the period in the command is lower than the corresponding period lower limit,
the system sets the waveform period of the specified channel to the
corresponding period lower limit.
When the channel waveform type is changed ([:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy?), the
instrument still uses the period if it is valid for the new waveform type; the
instrument displays prompt message and set the period to the period lower limit
of the new waveform type automatically if the period is invalid for the new
waveform type.
Return Format The query returns the waveform period in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 1.000000E-01 (the waveform period is 0.1s).
Example :SOUR1:PER 0.1 /*Set the waveform period of CH1 to 0.1s*/
:SOUR1:PER? /*Query the waveform period of CH1 and the query returns
1.000000E-01*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy?
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-155
:SOURce:PHASe Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PHASe[:ADJust]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:PHASe[:ADJust] {<phase>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PHASe[:ADJust]? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the waveform start phase (basic waveforms and arbitrary waveform) of the
specified channel.
Query the waveform start phase (basic waveforms and arbitrary waveform) of the
specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<phase> Real 0° to 360° 0°
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
If the start phase value in the command is lower than the corresponding start
phase lower limit, the system sets the waveform start phase of the specified
channel to the start phase lower limit.
Return Format The query returns the waveform start phase in scientific notation with 7 effective
digits, for example, 1.000000E+01 (the waveform start phase is 10°).
Example :SOUR1:PHAS 10 /*Set the waveform start phase of CH1 to 10°*/
:SOUR1:PHAS? /*Query the waveform start phase of CH1 and the query
returns 1.000000E+01*/
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PHASe:INITiate
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PHASe:SYNChronize
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:PHASe:INITiate
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PHASe:SYNChronize
Description Execute an align phase operation in the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
Explanation DG1000Z series dual-channel function/arbitrary waveform generator provides
the align phase function. After the align phase operation, the instrument
re-configures the two channels to make them output according to the
specified frequency and phase.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
When any of the two channel is in the modulation mode
([:SOURce[<n>]]:MOD[:STATe]), the align phase operation is invalid.
Syntax :SOUR1:PHAS:INIT /*Execute an align phase operation in CH1*/
:SOUR2:PHAS:SYNC /*Execute an align phase operation in CH2*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]]:MOD[:STATe]
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-156 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SOURce:PULSe Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:DCYCle
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:DCYCle {<percent>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:DCYCle? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the pulse duty cycle of the specified channel.
Query the pulse duty cycle of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<percent> Real 0.001% to 99.999% 50%
Explanation The pulse duty cycle is defined as the percentage that the pulse width
([:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:WIDTh) takes up in the pulse period
([:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:PERiod). The pulse duty cycle and pulse
period are related to each other and modifying any of the parameters will modify
the other one automatically.
The range of the pulse duty cycle is limited by the “minimum pulse width” and
“pulse period (for the ranges of the “minimum pulse width” and “pulse period”,
please refer to the “Signal Characteristics” of the “Specifications” in
DG1000Z
User’s Guide
). The actual range of the pulse duty cycle is
)21(100100
minmin pulsewdcyclepulsew
PPPPP ÷×−×<≤÷×
Wherein,
dcycle
P
——pulse duty cycle;
minw
P
——minimum pulse width;
pulse
P
——pulse period.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the pulse duty cycle in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 4.500000E+01 (the pulse duty cycle is 45%).
Example :SOUR1:PULS:DCYC 45 /*Set the pulse duty cycle of CH1 to 45%*/
:SOUR1:PULS:DCYC? /*Query the pulse duty cycle of CH1 and the query
returns 4.500000E+01*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:PERiod
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:WIDTh
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-157
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:HOLD
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:HOLD {WIDTh|DUTY}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:HOLD?
Description Set the highlight item of the specified channel to the pulse width (WIDTh) or pulse
duty cycle (DUTY).
Query the item highlighted in the specified channel (the pulse width or pulse duty
cycle).
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{WIDTh|DUTY} Discrete WIDTh|DUTY DUTY
Return Format The query returns WIDT or DUTY.
Example :SOUR1:PULS:HOLD WIDT /*Set the item highlighted in CH1 to pulse width*/
:SOUR1:PULS:HOLD? /*Query the item highlighted in CH1 and the query
returns WIDT*/
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:TRANsition[:LEADing]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:TRANsition[:LEADing] {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:TRANsition[:LEADing]? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the pulse rise time of the specified channel.
Query the pulse rise time of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<seconds> Real 10ns to 0.625×pulse width 20ns
Explanation The rise time is defined as the time required for the pulse amplitude to rise
from 10％ to 90％.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The range of the rise time is limited by the current waveform frequency and
pulse width. When the specified value exceeds the limits, the instrument will
adjust the edge time automatically to make it match the specified pulse width.
Return Format The query returns the pulse rise time in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 3.500000E-08 (the pulse rise time is 35ns).
Example :SOUR1:PULS:TRAN 0.000000035 /*Set the pulse rise time of CH1 to 35ns*/
:SOUR1:PULS:TRAN? /*Query the pulse rise time of CH1 and the
query returns 3.500000E-08*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-158 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:TRANsition:TRAiling
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:TRANsition:TRAiling {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:TRANsition:TRAiling? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the pulse fall time of the specified channel.
Query the pulse fall time of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<seconds> Real 10ns to 0.625×pulse width 20ns
Explanation The fall time is defined as the time required for the pulse amplitude to fall from
90％ to 10％.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The range of the fall time is limited by the current waveform frequency and pulse
width. When the specified value exceeds the limits, the instrument will adjust the
edge time automatically to make it match the specified pulse width.
Return Format The query returns the pulse fall time in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 3.500000E-08 (the pulse fall time is 35ns).
Example :SOUR1:PULS:TRAN:TRA 0.000000035 /*Set the pulse fall time of CH1 to 35ns*/
:SOUR1:PULS:TRAN:TRA? /*Query the pulse rise time of CH1 and
the query returns 3.500000E-08*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-159
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:WIDTh
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:WIDTh {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:WIDTh? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the pulse width of the specified channel.
Query the pulse width of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<seconds> Real 16ns to 999.999 982 118 590 6ks 500us
Explanation The pulse width is defined as the time interval between 50% of the amplitude
of a pulse rising edge to 50% of the amplitude of the next pulse falling edge.
The range of the pulse width is limited by the “minimum pulse width” and
“pulse period (for the ranges of the “minimum pulse width” and “pulse period”,
please refer to the “Signal Characteristics” of the “Specifications” in
DG1000Z
User’s Guide
). The actual range of the pulse width is
minmin
2
wpulsewidthw
PPPP ×−<≤
Wherein,
width
P
——pulse width;
minw
P
——minimum pulse width;
pulse
P
——pulse period.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the pulse width in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 1.000000E-02 (the pulse width is 10ms, namely 0.01s).
Example :SOUR1:FUNC:PULS:WIDT 0.01 /*Set the pulse width of CH1 to 10ms (namely
0.01s)*/
:SOUR1:FUNC:PULS:WIDT? /*Query the pulse width of CH1 and the query
returns 1.000000E-02*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-160 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SOURce:SUM Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM:AMPLitude
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM:AMPLitude {<amplitude>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM:AMPLitude? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the sum ratio of the waveform summing function of the specified channel.
Query the sum ratio of the waveform summing function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<amplitude> Real 0% to 100% 10%
Explanation The sum ratio refers to the ratio that the amplitude of the waveform to be
summed on the basic waveform relative to that of the basic waveform.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the sum ratio in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 1.000000E+01 (the sum ratio is 10%).
Example :SOUR1:SUM:AMPL 10 /*Set the sum ratio of the waveform summing function of
CH1 to 10%*/
:SOUR1:SUM:AMPL? /*Query the sum ratio of the waveform summing function
of CH1 and the query returns 1.000000E+01*/
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM:INTernal:FREQuency
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM:INTernal:FREQuency {<frequency>|MAXimum|MINimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM:INTernal:FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the sum frequency of the waveform summing function of the specified channel.
Query the sum frequency of the waveform summing function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<amplitude> Real 1uHz to 60MHz 1kHz
Explanation The sum frequency refers to the frequency of waveform to be summed on the
basic waveform.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the sum frequency in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 1.000000E+02 (the sum frequency is 100Hz).
Example :SOUR1:SUM:INT:FREQ 100 /*Set the sum frequency of the waveform summing
function of CH1 to 100Hz*/
:SOUR1:SUM:INT:FREQ? /*Query the sum frequency of the waveform
summing function of CH1 and the query returns
1.000000E+02*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-161
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM:INTernal:FUNCtion
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM:INTernal:FUNCtion <name>
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM:INTernal:FUNCtion?
Description Set the sum source of the waveform summing function of the specified channel.
Query the sum source of the waveform summing function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<name> Discrete SIN|SQU|RAMP|NOISe|ARB SIN
Explanation The sum source refers to the waveform to be summed on the basic waveform
and can be sine (SIN), square (SQU), ramp (RAMP), noise (NOISe) or arbitrary
waveform (ARB).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns SIN, SQU, RAMP, NOISe or ARB.
Example :SOUR1:SUM:INT:FUNC SQU /*Set the sum source of the waveform summing
function of CH1 to square*/
:SOUR1:SUM:INT:FUNC? /*Query the sum source of the waveform summing
function of CH1 and the query returns SQU*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-162 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM[:STATe]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM[:STATe]?
Description Turn on or off the waveform summing function of the specified channel.
Query the on/off status of the waveform summing function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation Waveform summing refers to summing the specified waveform on the basic
waveform and then output the result waveform. This function is only applicable
to the basic waveforms (except noise), arbitrary waveforms (except DC) and
harmonic waveform. The waveform summing function cannot be enabled when
the modulation ([:SOURce[<n>]]:MOD[:STATe]), sweep
([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe) or burst ([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe])
function is turned on.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :SOUR1:SUM ON /*Turn on the waveform summing function of CH1*/
:SOUR1:SUM? /*Query the on/off status of the waveform summing function of
CH1 and the query returns ON*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:MOD[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-163
:SOURce:SWEep Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:HTIMe:STARt
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:HTIMe:STARt {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:HTIMe:STARt? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the start hold of the sweep function of the specified channel.
Query the start hold of the sweep function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<seconds> Real 0s to 500s 0s
Explanation Start hold is the duration that the output signal outputs with the “Start
Frequency” ([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt) after the sweep starts. After
the start hold, the signal generator will output with varying frequency according
to the current sweep type.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
After the “Start Hold” is modified, the signal generator will output the sweep
waveform from the specified “Start Frequency”.
Return Format The query returns the start hold in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 1.000000E+00 (the start hold is 1s).
Example :SOUR1:SWE:HTIM:STAR 1 /*Set the start hold of the sweep function of CH1 to
1s*/
:SOUR1:SWE:HTIM:STAR? /*Query the start hold of the sweep function of CH1
and the query returns 1.000000E+00*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-164 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:HTIMe[:STOP]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:HTIMe[:STOP] {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:HTIMe[:STOP]? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the stop hold of the sweep function of the specified channel.
Query the stop hold of the sweep function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<seconds> Real 0s to 500s 0s
Explanation Stop Hold is the duration that the output signal outputs with the “Stop
Frequency” after the signal generator has swept from the “Start Frequency”
([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt) to the “Stop Frequency”
([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STOP).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
After the “Stop Hold” is modified, the signal generator will output the sweep
waveform from the specified “Start Frequency”.
Return Format The query returns the stop hold in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 1.000000E+00 (the stop hold is 1s).
Example :SOUR1:SWE:HTIM 1 /*Set the stop hold of the sweep function of CH1 to 1s*/
:SOUR1:SWE:HTIM? /*Query the stop hold of the sweep function of CH1 and the
query returns 1.000000E+00*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STOP
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-165
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:RTIMe
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:RTIMe {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:RTIMe? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the return time of the sweep function of the specified channel.
Query the return time of the sweep function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<seconds> Real 0s to 500s 0s
Explanation Return time describes the time in which the output signal returns to the “Start
frequency” from the “Stop Frequency” after the signal generator has swept from
the “Start Frequency” ([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt) to the “Stop
Frequency” ([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STOP) and stayed within the “Stop
Hold” ([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:HTIMe[:STOP]).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
After the “Return Time” is modified, the signal generator will output the sweep
waveform from the specified “Start Frequency”.
Return Format The query returns the return time in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 1.000000E+00 (the return time is 1s).
Example :SOUR1:SWE:RTIM 1 /*Set the return time of the sweep function of CH1 to 1s*/
:SOUR1:SWE:RTIM? /*Query the return time of the sweep function of CH1 and
the query returns 1.000000E+00*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STOP
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:HTIMe[:STOP]
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-166 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:SPACing
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:SPACing {LINear|LOGarithmic|STEp}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:SPACing?
Description Set the sweep type of the specified channel to linear (LINear), log (LOGarithmic) or
step (STEp).
Query the sweep type of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{LINear|LOGarithmic|STEp} Discrete LINear|LOGarithmic|STEp LINear
Explanation DG1000Z provides linear, log and step sweep types.
In linear sweep, the output frequency of the instrument varies linearly in the way
of “several Hertz per second”. The variation is controlled by the “Start Frequency”
([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt), “Stop Frequency”
([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STOP) and “Sweep Time”
([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TIME). A straight line is displayed on the waveform on
the screen, indicating that the output frequency varies linearly.
In log sweep, the output frequency of the instrument varies in a logarithmic
fashion, that is, the output frequency changes in the way of “octave per second”
or “decade per second”. The variation is controlled by the “Start Frequency”,
“Stop Frequency” and “Sweep Time”. An exponential function curve is displayed
on the waveform on the screen, indicating that the output frequency changes in
a logarithmic mode.
In step sweep, the output frequency of the instrument “steps” from the “Start
Frequency” to the “Stop Frequency”. The time that the output signal stays on
each frequency point is determined by the “Sweep Time” and “Step Number”. A
step waveform is displayed on the waveform on the screen, indicating that the
output frequency varies in “Step”.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns LIN, LOG or STE.
Example :SOUR1:SWE:SPAC LIN /*Set the sweep type of CH1 to linear*/
:SOUR1:SWE:SPAC? /*Query the sweep type of CH1 and the query returns
LIN*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STOP
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TIME
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-167
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe {ON|1|OFF|0}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe?
Description Turn on or off the sweep function of the specified channel.
Query the on/off status of the sweep function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation DG1000Z can output sweep waveform from a single channel or both of the two
channels at the same time. In the sweep mode, the signal generator outputs
from the start frequency to the stop frequency within the specified sweep time.
DG1000Z supports linear, log and step sweeps and allow users to set the “Mark”
frequency, start hold, stop hold and return time. Besides, it supports internal,
external and manual trigger sources and can generate sweep output for sine,
square, ramp and arbitrary waveform (except DC) (does not support the sweep
signals for the pulse and noise in the basic waveforms).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
If the modulation ([:SOURce[<n>]]:MOD[:STATe]) or burst
([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]) function is currently turned on, it will be
turned off automatically when the sweep function is turned on.
If the harmonic function ([:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]) is currently
turned on, the sweep function cannot be turned on.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :SOUR1:SWE:STAT ON /*Turn on the sweep function of CH1*/
:SOUR1:SWE:STAT? /*Query the on/off status of the sweep function of CH1
and the query returns ON*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:MOD[:STATe]
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-168 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STEP
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STEP {<n>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STEP? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the number of steps of the sweep of the specified channel.
Query the number of steps of the sweep of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<n> Integer 2 to 1024 2
Explanation The number of steps refers to the number of steps required for the instrument to
sweep from the “Start Frequency” ([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt) to the
“Stop Frequency” ([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STOP). This command is only
applicable to the step sweep ([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:SPACing).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the number of steps of the sweep in scientific notation with 7
effective digits, for example, 5.000000E+00 (the number of steps is 5).
Example :SOUR1:SWE:STEP 5 /*Set the number of steps of the sweep of CH1 to 5*/
:SOUR1:SWE:STEP? /*Query the number of steps of the sweep of CH1 and the
query returns 5.000000E+00*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STOP
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:SPACing
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-169
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TIME
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TIME {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TIME? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the sweep time of the specified channel.
Query the sweep time of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<seconds> Real 1ms to 500s 1s
Explanation The sweep time refers to the time required for the instrument to sweep from
the “Start Frequency” ([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt) to the “Stop
Frequency” ([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STOP).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
After the “Sweep Time” is modified, the signal generator will output the sweep
waveform from the specified “Start Frequency”.
Return Format The query returns the sweep time in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 5.000000E+00 (the sweep time is 5s).
Example :SOUR1:SWE:TIME 5 /*Set the sweep time of CH1 to 5s*/
:SOUR1:SWE:TIME? /*Query the sweep time of CH1 and the query returns
5.000000E+00*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STOP
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger[:IMMediate]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger[:IMMediate]
Description Trigger a sweep immediately in the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
Explanation This command is only applicable to manual trigger
([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SOURce) and is only valid when the output
of the corresponding channel is turned on.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Example :SOUR1:SWE:TRIG /*Trigger a sweep immediately in CH1*/
Related
Commands :OUTPut[<n>][:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SOURce
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-170 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SLOPe
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SLOPe {POSitive|NEGative}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SLOPe?
Description Set the edge type of the trigger input signal of the specified channel to rising edge
(POSitive) or falling edge (NEGative).
Query the edge type of the trigger input signal of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{POSitive|NEGative} Discrete POSitive|NEGative POSitive
Explanation Set the edge type of the trigger input signal, namely select the instrument to
trigger on the rising edge or falling edge of the trigger input signal.
This command is only applicable to external trigger
([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SOURce). In external trigger, the
instrument receives the trigger signal inputted from the
[Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the corresponding channel at the rear
panel and initiates a sweep each time a TTL pulse with the specified polarity is
received.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns POS or NEG.
Example :SOUR1:SWE:TRIG:SLOP POS /*Set the edge type of the trigger input signal of
CH1 to rising edge*/
:SOUR1:SWE:TRIG:SLOP? /*Query the edge type of the trigger input signal
of CH1 and the query returns POS*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SOURce
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-171
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SOURce
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SOURce {INTernal|EXTernal|MANual}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SOURce?
Description Set the trigger source of the sweep of the specified channel to internal source
(INTernal), external source (EXTernal) or manual source (MANual).
Query the trigger source of the sweep of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{INTernal|EXTernal|MANual} Discrete INTernal|EXTernal|MANual INTernal
Explanation In internal trigger, the signal generator outputs continuous sweep waveform.
The trigger period is determined by the specified sweep time
([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TIME), return time
([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:RTIMe), start hold
([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:HTIMe:STARt) and stop hold
([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:HTIMe[:STOP]). You can also set the
[Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the corresponding channel at the rear
panel to output trigger signal with the specified edge
([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:TRIGOut).
In external trigger, the signal generator receives the trigger signal inputted from
the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the corresponding channel at the rear
panel and initiates a sweep each time a TTL pulse with the specified polarity
([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SLOPe) is received.
In manual trigger, the instrument initiates a sweep in the corresponding channel
immediately each time the trigger command
([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger[:IMMediate]) is send (the trigger command
is only valid when the output of the specified channel is turned on).
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns INT, EXT or MAN.
Example :SOUR1:SWE:TRIG:SOUR INT /*Set the trigger source of the sweep of CH1 to
internal*/
:SOUR1:SWE:TRIG:SOUR? /*Query the trigger source of the sweep of CH1
and the query returns INT*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:HTIMe:STARt
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:HTIMe[:STOP]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:RTIMe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TIME
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger[:IMMediate]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SLOPe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:TRIGOut
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-172 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:TRIGOut
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:TRIGOut {POSitive|NEGative|OFF}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:TRIGOut?
Description Set the edge type of the trigger output signal in the sweep mode of the specified
channel to rising edge (POSitive) or falling edge (NEGative) or turn off the trigger
output signal (OFF).
Query the type of the trigger output signal in the sweep mode of the specified
channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{POSitive|NEGative|OFF} Discrete POSitive|NEGative|OFF POSitive
Explanation Set the edge type of the trigger output signal, namely select the output signal of
the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the corresponding channel at the rear
panel to change from low level to high level (POSitive) or from high level to low
level (NEGative) at the start of the sweep.
This command is only applicable to internal or manual trigger
([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SOURce).
When “Leading” is selected, the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the
corresponding channel at the rear panel outputs the trigger signal. The trigger
signal, which is the same as the sync signal, changes from low level to high level
at the start of each sweep (that is, trigger at the rising edge) and returns to low
level at the center frequency point or at the specified mark frequency point.
When “Trailing” is selected, the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the
corresponding channel at the rear panel outputs the trigger signal which changes
from high level to low level at the start of each sweep (that is, trigger at the
falling edge) and returns to high level at the center frequency point or at the
specified mark frequency point.
When the trigger output is turned off, the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of
the corresponding channel at the rear panel outputs the sync signal which
changes from low level to high level at the start of each sweep and returns to low
level at the center frequency point or at the specified mark frequency point.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns POS, NEG or OFF.
Example :SOUR1:SWE:TRIG:TRIGO POS /*Set the edge type of the trigger output signal of
CH1 to rising edge*/
:SOUR1:SWE:TRIG:TRIGO? /*Query the edge type of the trigger output signal
of CH1 and the query returns POS*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SOURce
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-173
:SOURce:TRACe Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:CATalog?
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:CATalog?
Description Query the arbitrary waveform data files currently stored.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
Return Format The query returns a string consisting of 10 parts separated by commas which
represent the arbitrary waveform data files in the corresponding storage locations
respectively. Each part is a string enclosed in double quotation marks and the
content enclosed in the double quotation marks is the filename of the arbitrary
waveform data file. The content enclosed in the double quotation marks is empty if
the specified storage location does not contain arbitrary waveform data file. For
example, "000.RAF","330.RAF","","","","","","","","".
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:COPY
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:COPY <trace_name>,VOLATILE
Description Copy the arbitrary waveform data file stored to the volatile memory of the specified
channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<trace_name> ASCII string Filenames of the
arbitrary waveform
data files stored None
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the file will be copied to the volatile
memory of CH1 by default.
Example :SOUR1:DATA:COPY 000.RAF,VOLATILE /*Copy the arbitrary waveform data
file 000.RAF stored to the volatile
memory of CH1*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-174 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:DAC16
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:DAC16 VOLATILE,<flag>,<data>
Description Download waveform table to the DDRII internal memory.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<flag> ASCII string Refer to the “Explanation” None
<data>
Explanation The command consists of two parts; wherein, the first part is the command
string ([:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:DAC16 VOLATILE,<flag>,) and the
second part is the binary data (<data>).
<flag> denotes the data transimmision status and can be set to CON or END;
Wherein, CON denotes that there is still data package after this one; END
denotes that this is the last data package and the data transimission finishes.
<data> denotes the binary data to be downloaded, the length of the data is
16Bytes (8pts) to 32kBytes (16kpts).
<data> is a binary data block start with #. For example, #516384 binary data,
the number 5 behind # denotes that the data length information (16384)
occupies 5 characters; 16384 denotes the number of bytes of the binary data
following it. The range of each binary data is from 0000 to 3FFF. Each
waveform point occupies 2 bytes, therefore the number of bytes must be an
even number.
When <flag> in the command is set to END, the instrument switches to
arbitrary waveform output automatically.
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-175
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:DAC
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:DAC
VOLATILE,[<binary_block_data>|<value>,<value>,<value>......]
Description Download the binary data block or decimal DAC values to the volatile memory of the
specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<binary_block_data> ASCII string Refer to the “Explanation” None
<value>
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related parameters
of CH1 by default.
<binary_block_data> is the binary data to be downloaded, the length of the data is
16Bytes (8pts) to 32kBytes (16kpts). <binary_block_data> is a binary data block
start with #. For example, #516384 binary data, the number 5 behind # denotes
that the data length information (16384) occupies 5 characters; 16384 denotes the
number of bytes of the binary data following it. The range of each binary data is
from 0000 to 3FFF. Each waveform point occupies 2 bytes, therefore the number of
bytes must be an even number.
<value> denotes the decimal DAC values to be downloaded and the range is from 0
to 16383. Wherein, 0 and 16383 correspond to the minimum and maximum of the
amplitude respectively. For example, 0 correspods to -2.5V and 16383 corresponds
to 2.5V if the amplitude is set to 5Vpp and the offset is set to 0VDC. The number of
the waveform points ranges from 8pts to 16384pts. For example, sending
VOLATILE,0,16383,8192,0,16383 command denotes sending 5 data points.
When the number of data points in the command is between 8pts and 8kpts (include
8kpts), if the instrument is currently in the frequency output mode, the instrument
will extend the number of data points to 8192 automatically using the average
interpolation mode; if the instrument is in the sample rate output mode, the number
of data points remains unchanged.
When the number of data points in the command is between 8kpts (not include
8kpts) and 16kpts, the instrument will select the sample rate output mode
automatically and the number of data points remains unchanged.
After sending the command, the instrument switches the specified channel to
output volatile waveform automatically and modifies the number of editable points
at the same time. You can edit the data sent using this command in local mode.
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-176 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA[:DATA]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA[:DATA] VOLATILE,<value>{,<value>......}
Description Download the floating voltage to the volatile memory of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<value> Real -1 to +1 None
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
<value> denotes the floating voltage, -1 and 1 correspond to the maximum
and minimum values of the waveform respectively. For example, if the
amplitude is set to 5Vpp and the offset is set to 0VDC, 1 corresponds to 2.5V
and -1 corresponds to -2.5V. This command overwrites the last waveform in
the volatile memory (no error will be generated).
8 to 16384 (16k) points can be downloaded each time.
After the command is sent, the instrument switches the specified channel to
output the volatile waveform automatically as well as modifies the
interpolation mode and the number of the editable points. The data sent using
this command can be edited in local mode.
Example :SOUR1:DATA VOLATILE,-0.6,-0.4,-0.3,-0.1,0,0.1,0.2,0.3
/*Download the floating voltages -0.6, -0.4, -0.3, -0.1, 0, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3 to the
volatile memory of CH1*/
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:DELete[:NAME]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:DELete[:NAME] <trace_name>
Description Delete the specified arbitrary waveform data file stored.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<trace_name> ASCII string Filenames of the
arbitrary waveform
data files stored None
Explanation The specified arbitrary waveform data file cannot be deleted if it is locked
([:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:LOCK[:STATe]).
Example :DATA:DEL 000.RAF /*Delete the stored arbitrary waveform data file
000.RAF*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:LOCK[:STATe]
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-177
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:LOAD
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:LOAD? VOLATILE
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:LOAD? <Num>
Description Query t
he number of the arbitrary waveform data packages in the volatile memory.
Read the specified arbitrary waveform data package in the volatile memory.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<Num> Integer 1 to the number of data packages 1
Explanation This command is used to load the specified arbitrary waveform in the memory to
the PC software. First, send the [:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:LOAD? VOLATILE
command to acquire the number of the data packages. Then, send the
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:LOAD? <Num> command to read the Numth data
package. The data read contains an 11-bit header denoting the amount of data in
this transmission. For example, #9000016384 denotes that 16K data is transmitted
in this operation. Before reading the data, you need to query the total number of
the data packages.
Return Format Sending the [:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:LOAD? VOLATILE command returns a
decimal value. Sending the [:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:LOAD? <Num>
command returns a binary data package starting with #. For example,
#9000016384 binary data. Wherein, the number 9 behind # denotes that the data
length information (000016384) occupies 9 characters; 000016384 denotes the
number of bytes of the binary data following it.
Example :DATA:LOAD? VOLATILE /*Query the number of the arbitrary waveform data
packages in the volatile memory and the query returns
5*/
:DATA:LOAD? 1 /*Read the first arbitrary waveform data package in the
volatile memory and the query returns a string starting
with #*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-178 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:LOCK[:STATe]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:LOCK[:STATe] <trace_name>,{ON|OFF|1|0}
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:LOCK[:STATe]? <trace_name>
Description Lock or unlock the arbitrary waveform data file stored.
Query whether the specified arbitrary waveform data file stored is locked.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<trace_name> ASCII string Filenames of the arbitrary
waveform files stored None
{ON|OFF|1|0} Bool ON|OFF|1|0 OFF
Explanation The locked arbitrary waveform data file cannot be deleted
([:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:DELete[:NAME]).
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :DATA:LOCK 000.RAF,ON /*Lock the arbitrary waveform data file 000.RAF*/
:DATA:LOCK? 000.RAF /*Query whether the arbitrary waveform data file
000.RAF is locked and the query returns ON*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:DELete[:NAME]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:POINts
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:POINts
VOLATILE[,<points>|MINimum|MAXimum]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:POINts? VOLATILE[,MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the number of initial points of the waveform editing.
Query the number of initial points of the waveform editing.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<points> Integer 8 to 16384 8
Explanation After this command is sent, the instrument switches the output mode to arbitrary
waveform (volatile waveform) automatically and initializes the volatile waveform to
waveform with the specified number of points of which the amplitudes are 0. At this
point, you can send the [:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:VALue command to set the
amplitude of the specified point.
Return Format The query returns an integer between 8 and 16384.
Example :DATA:POIN VOLATILE,9 /*Set the number of initial points of the waveform
editing to 9*/
:DATA:POIN? VOLATILE /*Query the number of initial points of the waveform
editing and the query returns 9*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:VALue
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-179
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:VALue
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:VALue VOLATILE,<point>,<data>
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:VALue? VOLATILE,<point>
Description Modify the decimal integer value of the specified point in the volatile memory.
Query the decimal integer value of the specified point in the volatile memory.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<point> Integer 1 to the number of
waveform points None
<data> Integer 0 to 16383 None
Explanation <point> is the point to be modified and <data> is a decimal data.
This command is only valid when the output waveform is arbitrary waveform
and the arbitrary waveform type is volatile waveform.
Return Format The query returns an integer between 0 and 16383.
Example :DATA:VAL VOLATILE,5,8 /*Modify the decimal integer value of the fifth point
to 8*/
:DATA:VAL? VOLATILE,5 /*Query the decimal integer value of the fifth point
and the query returns 8*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-180 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SOURce:TRACK Command
[:SOURce[<n>]]:TRACK
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:TRACK {ON|OFF|INVerted}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:TRACK?
Description Set the state of the track function of the specified channel to ON, OFF or INVerted.
Query the state of the track function of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{ON|OFF|INVerted} Discrete ON|OFF|INVerted OFF
Explanation On: enable the track function. The instrument copies the various parameters and
states (except the channel output state) of CH1 to CH2 automatically. When the
parameters or states of CH1 are changed, the corresponding parameters or
states of CH2 (except the channel output state) will be adjusted to the same
values or states automatically. At this point, the dual channels (if the channel
outputs are currently enabled) can output the same signal.
Off: disable the track function.
Inverted: the track function is enabled. The instrument copies the various
parameters and states (except the channel output state) of CH1 to CH2
automatically. When the parameters or states of CH1 are changed, the
corresponding parameters or states of CH2 (except the channel output state) will
be adjusted to the same value automatically. At this point, CH2 (if the channel
output is currently enabled) outputs the inverted signal of the output signal of
CH1.
When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
When the track function is enabled, the coupling function and channel copy
function are disabled, the user interface is switched to single channel view mode
and the current channel is CH1.
Return Format The query returns ON, OFF or INVERTED.
Example :SOUR1:TRACK ON /*Set the state of the track function of CH1 to ON */
:SOUR1:TRACK? /*Query the state of the track function of CH1 and the query
returns ON*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-181
:SOURce:VOLTage Comamnds
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage:COUPle[:STATe]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage:COUPle[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage:COUPle[:STATe]?
Description Turn on or off the amplitude coupling function.
Query the on/off status of the amplitude coupling function.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation When the amplitude coupling is enabled, CH1 and CH2 take each other as the
reference source. When the amplitude of one channel (the reference source) is
changed, the amplitude of the other channel will be changed automatically and
always keeps the specified amplitude deviation or ratio with that of the reference
channel.
Please select the desired amplitude coupling mode (:COUPling:AMPL:MODE) and
set the corresponding amplitude deviation (:COUPling:AMPL:DEViation) or
amplitude ratio (:COUPling:AMPL:RATio) before enabling the amplitude coupling
function. You cannot set the amplitude coupling mode and the amplitude
deviation/ratio after the amplitude coupling function is enabled.
You can also send the :COUPling:AMPL[:STATe] command to set and query the
on/off status of the amplitude coupling function.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :SOUR1:VOLT:COUP ON /*Turn on the amplitude coupling function*/
:SOUR1:VOLT:COUP? /*Query the on/off status of the amplitude coupling
function and the query returns ON*/
Related
Commands :COUPling:AMPL:DEViation
:COUPling:AMPL:MODE
:COUPling:AMPL:RATio
:COUPling:AMPL[:STATe]
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-182 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]
{<amplitude>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the waveform amplitude of the specified channel (basic waveforms and arbitrary
waveform).
Query the waveform amplitude of the specified channel (basic waveforms and
arbitrary waveform).
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<amplitude> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 5Vpp
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The minimum of <amplitude> is 2mVpp and the maximum is limited by the
“Impedance” (:OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance or :OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD) and
“Frequency/Period” ([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency[:FIXed] or
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PERiod[:FIXed]) settings. If the amplitude in the command is
greater than the corresponding upper limit or lower than the corresponding
lower limit, the system will set the waveform amplitude of the specified channel
to the amplitude upper limit or lower limit.
The current amplitude of the instrument is the default value or the amplitude set
formerly. When the configuration (such as the frequency) of the instrument is
changed, the instrument still uses the current amplitude if the amplitude is valid;
the instrument displays prompt message and set the amplitude to the amplitude
upper limit of the new configuration automatically if the current amplitude is
invalid.
You can use the “High Level” or “Low Level” to set the amplitude and offset.
Amplitude = High Level - Low Level
Offset = (High Level + Low Level)/2
Return Format The query returns the waveform amplitude in scientific notation with 7 effective
digits, for example, 5.000000E+00 (the waveform amplitude is 5Vpp).
Example :SOUR1:VOLT 5 /*Set the waveform amplitude of CH1 to 5Vpp*/
:SOUR1:VOLT? /*Query the waveform amplitude of CH1 and the query returns
5.000000E+00*/
Related
Commands :OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
:OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency[:FIXed]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PERiod[:FIXed]
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-183
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:HIGH
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:HIGH
{<voltage>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:HIGH? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description
Set the high level value of the waveform (basic waveform and arbitrary waveform) of
the specified channel.
Query the high level value of the waveform (basic waveform and arbitrary waveform)
of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<voltage> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 2.5Vpp
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
You can also use the “Amplitude”
([:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]) and “Offset”
([:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet) to set the high level
and low level.
High Level = Offset + Amplitude/2
Low Level = Offset - Amplitude/2
Return Format The query returns the waveform high level value in scientific notation with 7 effective
digits, for example, 3.500000E+00 (the waveform high level value is 3.5Vpp).
Example :SOUR1:VOLT:HIGH 3.5 /*Set the high level value of the waveform of CH1 to
3.5Vpp*/
:SOUR1:VOLT:HIGH? /*Query the high level value of the waveform of CH1 and
the query returns 3.500000E+00*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-184 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LOW
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LOW
{<voltage>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LOW? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the low level value of the waveform (basic waveform and arbitrary waveform) of
the specified channel.
Query the low level value of the waveform (basic waveform and arbitrary waveform)
of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<voltage> Real Refer to the “Explanation” -2.5Vpp
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
You can also use the “Amplitude”
([:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]) and “Offset”
([:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet) to set the high level
and low level.
High Level = Offset + Amplitude/2
Low Level = Offset - Amplitude/2
Return Format The query returns the waveform low level value in scientific notation with 7 effective
digits, for example, -1.500000E+00 (the waveform low level value is -1.5Vpp).
Example :SOUR1:VOLT:LOW -1.5 /*Set the low level value of the waveform of CH1 to
-1.5Vpp*/
:SOUR1:VOLT:LOW? /*Query the low level value of the waveform of CH1 and
the query returns -1.500000E+00*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-185
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet
{<voltage>|MINimum|MAXimum}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the waveform offset voltage of the specified channel.
Query the waveform offset voltage of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
<voltage> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 0VDC
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
The range of the DC offset voltage is limited by the “Impedance”
(:OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance or :OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD), “Frequency”
([:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency[:FIXed]) and “Amplitude”
([:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]) settings. If the
offset in the command is greater than the corresponding offset upper limit or
lower than the corresponding offset lower limit, the system will set the waveform
offset of the specified channel to the offset upper limit or lower limit.
The current DC offset voltage of the instrument is the default value or the offset
specified formerly. When the instrument configuration (such as the impedance)
is changed, the instrument still uses the current offset if the offset is valid; the
instrument displays prompt message and set the offset to the offset upper limit
of the new configuration automatically if the current offset is invalid.
Return Format The query returns the waveform offset voltage in scientific notation with 7 effective
digits, for example, 1.000000E+00 (the waveform offset voltage is 1VDC).
Example :SOUR1:VOLT:OFFS 1 /*Set the offset voltage of CH1 to 1VDC*/
:SOUR1:VOLT:OFFS? /*Query the offset voltage of CH1 and the query returns
1.000000E+00*/
Related
Commands :OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
:OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency[:FIXed]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-186 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO {OFF|ON|0|1}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO?
Description Set the range of the specified channel to auto (ON or 1) or hold (OFF or 0).
Query the on/off status of the auto range of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{OFF|ON|0|1} Bool OFF|ON|0|1 ON
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
ON|1: set the channel range to auto. The instrument selects the optimum
amplifier/attenuator combination automatically.
OFF|0: set the channel range to hold. In this mode, the possible transient
amplitude variation of the output signal when the attenuator range is changed
and during the switch process can be eliminated, which might affect the
amplitude and offset accuracy, the resolution as well as the waveform fidelity.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :SOUR1:VOLT:RANG:AUTO ON /*Set the range of CH1 to auto*/
:SOUR1:VOLT:RANG:AUTO? /*Query the on/off status of the auto range of
CH1 and the query returns ON*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-187
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage:UNIT
Syntax [:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage:UNIT {VPP|VRMS|DBM}
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage:UNIT?
Description Set the amplitude unit of the specified channel to Vpp (VPP), Vrms (VRMS) or dBm
(DBM).
Query the amplitude unit of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{VPP|VRMS|DBM} Discrete VPP|VRMS|DBM VPP
Explanation When [:SOURce[<n>]] or [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related
parameters of CH1 by default.
Vpp is the unit of the peak-peak value of the signal; Vrms the unit of the effective
value of the signal; dBm is the unit of the absolute value of the power of the
signal. The relation between Vpp and Vrms differs for different waveform.
Take sine as an example. The conversion relation between
Vpp
and
Vrms
fulfills the equation
VrmsVpp 22=
.
dBm
and
Vrms
fulfills the equation
)
001.0
1
lg(10 2
WR
Vrms
dBm ×=
.
Wherein,
R
denotes the output impedance of the channel and must be a
specific value; therefore, dBm cannot be used when the output impedance is
HighZ.
Return Format The query returns VPP, VRMS or DBM.
Example :SOUR1:VOLT:UNIT VPP /*Set the amplitude unit of CH1 to Vpp*/
:SOUR1:VOLT:UNIT? /*Query the amplitude unit of CH1 and the query returns
VPP*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-188 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SYSTem Commands
The :SYSTem commands are used to set the beeper state, query the number of channels of the instrument
and the current channel, set the various interface (GPIB, LAN and USB) parameters and states, execute the
channel copy operation, query the error queue, lock the front panel, set the system language and power-on
status, set the clock source as well as query the system version.
Command List:
:SYSTem:BEEPer[:IMMediate]
:SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe
:SYSTem:CHANnel:CURrent
:SYSTem:CHANnel:NUMber?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:APPLy
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:AUTOip[:STATe]
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:CONTrol?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DHCP[:STATe]
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DNS
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DOMain
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:GATEway
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:HOSTname
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:MAC?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SMASk
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:STATic[:STATe]
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:UPDate
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:INFormation?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB[:SELF]:CLASs
:SYSTem:CSCopy
:SYSTem:ERRor?
:SYSTem:KLOCk
:SYSTem:LANGuage
:SYSTem:POWeron
:SYSTem:PRESet
:SYSTem:ROSCillator:SOURce
:SYSTem:SECurity:IMMediate
:SYSTem:VERSion?
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-189
:SYSTem:BEEPer[:IMMediate]
Syntax :SYSTem:BEEPer[:IMMediate]
Description The beeper generates a beep immediately.
Explanation This command will not be affected by the current on/off status of the beeper. The
beeper will generate a beep immediately when this command is sent even if the
beeper is currently turned off.
:SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe
Syntax :SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe {ON|1|OFF|0}
:SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe?
Description Turn on or off the beeper.
Query the beeper status.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 ON
Explanation When the beeper is turned on, the beeper beeps when error occurs during
front-panel operation or remote operation.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :SYST:BEEP:STAT 1 /*Turn on the beeper */
:SYST:BEEP:STAT? /*Query the beeper status and the query returns ON*/
:SYSTem:CHANnel:CURrent
Syntax :SYSTem:CHANnel:CURrent {CH1|CH2}
:SYSTem:CHANnel:CURrent?
Description Select the current channel.
Query the current channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{CH1|CH2} Discrete CH1|CH2 CH1
Return Format The query returns CH1 or CH2.
Example :SYST:CHAN:CUR CH2 /*Select CH2 as the current channel*/
:SYST:CHAN:CUR? /*Query the current channel and the query returns
CH2*/
:SYSTem:CHANnel:NUMber?
Syntax :SYSTem:CHANnel:NUMber?
Description Query the number of channels of the instrument.
Return Format The query returns an integer.
Example :SYST:CHAN:NUM? /*Query the number of channels of the instrument and the
query returns 2*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-190 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess <integer>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess?
Description Set the GPIB address of the instrument.
Query the GPIB address of the instrument.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<integer> Integer 0 to 30 2
Explanation To use the GPIB interface, make sure that your PC has installed the GPIB card. Then,
connect the USB terminal of the USB-GPIB interface converter to the USB Host
interface at the front panel of the signal generator and connect the GPIB terminal of
the USB-GPIB interface converter to the GPIB card terminal of the PC.
Return Format The query returns the GPIB address in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 7.000000E+00 (the GPIB address is 7).
Example :SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 7 /*Set the GPIB address of the instrument to 7*/
:SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR? /*Query the GPIB address of the instrument and
the query returns 7.000000E+00*/
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:APPLy
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:APPLy
Description Apply the current network parameters.
Explanation After setting the LAN parameters, the new settings will only take effect when this
command is executed.
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-191
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:AUTOip[:STATe]
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:AUTOip[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:AUTOip[:STATe]?
Description Turn on or off the AutoIP configuration mode.
Query the status of the AutoIP configuration mode.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 ON
Explanation Before using the LAN interface, connect the instrument to the PC or the
network of the PC using a network cable.
The instrument provides DHCP, AutoIP or ManualIP configuration modes.
In AutoIP mode, the signal generator acquires IP address within 169.254.0.1
and 169.254.255.254 and subnet mask 255.255.0.0 automatically according to
the current network configuration.
If all the three IP configuration modes are “On”, the priority of parameters
configuration from high to low is “DHCP”, “AutoIP” and “ManualIP”. Therefore,
to enable the AutoIP configuration mode, “DHCP” must be set to “Off”.
The three IP configuration modes cannot be set to “Off” at the same time.
After sending this command, the new settings will only take effect when
the :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:APPLy command is executed to apply the
current network parameters.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :SYST:COMM:LAN:AUTO OFF /*Turn off the AutoIP configuration mode*/
:SYST:COMM:LAN:AUTO? /*Query the status of the AutoIP configuration
mode and the query returns OFF*/
Related
Command :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:APPLy
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:CONTrol?
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:CONTrol?
Description Query the number of the initial control connecting terminal used for socket
communication.
Return Format The query returns 5555; if the interface does not support socket, the query returns
0.
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-192 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DHCP[:STATe]
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DHCP[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DHCP[:STATe]?
Description Turn on or off the DHCP configuration mode.
Query the status of the DHCP configuration mode.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 ON
Explanation In DHCP mode, DHCP server in the current network assigns LAN parameters,
e.g. IP address, for the signal generator.
If all the three IP configuration modes are “On”, the priority of parameters
configuration from high to low is “DHCP”, “AutoIP” and “ManualIP”.
The three IP configuration modes cannot be set to “Off” at the same time.
After sending this command, the new settings will only take effect when
the :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:APPLy command is executed to apply the
current network parameters.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :SYST:COMM:LAN:DHCP OFF /*Turn off the DHCP configuration mode*/
:SYST:COMM:LAN:DHCP? /*Query the status of the DHCP configuration mode
and the query returns OFF*/
Related
Command :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:APPLy
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-193
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DNS
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DNS <address>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DNS?
Description Set the DNS (Domain Name Service) address.
Query the DNS address.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<address> ASCII string Refer to the “Explanation” None
Explanation This command is only valid when the ManualIP configuration mode is turned on
(:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:STATic[:STATe]).
The format of <address> is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn; wherein, the first nnn ranges
from 1 to 223 (except 127) and the other three nnn range from 0 to 255. It is
recommended that users acquire an available DNS address from their network
administrator.
After sending this command, the new settings will only take effect when
the :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:APPLy command is executed to apply the
current network parameters.
Return Format The query returns a string, for example, 202.106.46.151.
Example :SYST:COMM:LAN:DNS 202.106.46.151 /*Set the DNS address to
202.106.46.151*/
:SYST:COMM:LAN:DNS? /*Query the DNS address and the query
returns 202.106.46.151*/
Related
Commands :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:APPLy
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:STATic[:STATe]
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DOMain
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DOMain <name>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DOMain?
Description Set the domain name.
Query the domain name.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<name> ASCII string Refer to the “Explanation” YYYRigolLan
Explanation <name> is the specified domain name and cannot exceeds 99 characters (can
include English characters and numbers).
Return Format The query returns a string.
Example :SYST:COMM:LAN:DOM RIGOL /*Set the domain name to RIGOL*/
:SYST:COMM:LAN:DOM? /*Query the domain name and the query
returns RIGOL*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-194 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:GATEway
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:GATEway <address>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:GATEway?
Description Set the default gateway.
Query the default gateway.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<address> ASCII string Refer to the “Explanation” None
Explanation This command is only valid when the ManualIP configuration mode is turned on
(:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:STATic[:STATe]).
The format of <address> is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn; wherein, the first nnn ranges
from 1 to 223 (except 127) and the other three nnn range from 0 to 255. It is
recommended that users acquire an available default gateway from their
network administrator.
After sending this command, the new settings will only take effect when
the :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:APPLy command is executed to apply the
current network parameters.
Return Format The query returns a string, for example, 192.168.1.1.
Example :SYST:COMM:LAN:GATE 192.168.1.1 /*Set the default gateway to
192.168.1.1*/
:SYST:COMM:LAN:GATE? /*Query the default gateway and the
query returns 192.168.1.1*/
Related
Commands :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:APPLy
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:STATic[:STATe]
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:HOSTname
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:HOSTname <name>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:HOSTname?
Description Set the host name.
Query the host name.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<name> ASCII string Refer to the “Explanation” YYYrigollan
Explanation <name> is the specified host name and cannot exceeds 99 characters (can include
English characters and numbers).
Return Format The query returns a string.
Example :SYST:COMM:LAN:HOST RIGOL123 /*Set the host name to RIGOL123*/
:SYST:COMM:LAN:HOST? /*Query the host name and the query returns
RIGOL123*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-195
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress <ip_address>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress?
Description Set the IP address.
Query the IP address.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<ip_address> ASCII string Refer to the “Explanation” None
Explanation This command is only valid when the ManualIP configuration mode is turned
on (:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:STATic[:STATe]).
The format of <ip_address> is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn; wherein, the first nnn ranges
from 1 to 223 (except 127) and the other three nnn range from 0 to 255. It is
recommended that users acquire an available address from their network
administrator.
After sending this comammd, the new settings will only take effect when
the :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:APPLy command is executed to apply the
current network parameters.
Return Format The query returns a string, for example, 192.168.1.88.
Example :SYST:COMM:LAN:IPAD 192.168.1.88 /*Set the IP address to 192.168.1.88*/
:SYST:COMM:LAN:IPAD? /*Query the IP address and the query
returns 192.168.1.88*/
Related
Commands :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:APPLy
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:STATic[:STATe]
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:MAC?
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:MAC?
Description Query the MAC address of the instrument.
Explanation MAC (Media Access Control) address, also called hardware address, is used for
defining the position of the network device. For a signal generator, the MAC address
is always unique. It is always used to identify the instrument while assigning IP
address for instrument. MAC address (48 bits, namely 6 bytes) is usually expressed
in hexadecimal format, such as 00-14-0E-42-12-CF.
Return Format The query returns a string, for example, 00-14-0E-42-12-CF.
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-196 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SMASk
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SMASk <mask>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SMASk?
Description Set the subnet mask.
Query the subnet mask.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<mask> ASCII string Refer to the “Explanation” None
Explanation This command is only valid when the ManualIP configuration mode is turned on
(:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:STATic[:STATe]).
The format of <mask> is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn; wherein, nnn ranges from 0 to 255.
It is recommended that users acquire an available subnet mask from their
network administrator.
After sending this comammd, the new settings will only take effect when
the :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:APPLy command is executed to apply the
current network parameters.
The subnet mask must be continuous, namely the 1 and 0 must be continuous.
Return Format The query returns a string, for example, 255.255.255.0.
Example :SYST:COMM:LAN:SMAS 255.255.255.0 /*Set the subnet mask to 255.255.255.0*/
:SYST:COMM:LAN:SMAS? /*Query the subnet mask and the query
returns 255.255.255.0*/
Related
Commands :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:APPLy
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:STATic[:STATe]
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-197
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:STATic[:STATe]
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:STATic[:STATe] {ON|1|OFF|0}
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:STATic[:STATe]?
Description Turn on or off the ManualIP configuration mode.
Query the status of the ManualIP configuration mode.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation In ManualIP mode, the LAN parameters of the signal generator, e.g. IP address,
are defined by users.
If all the three IP configuration modes are “On”, the priority of parameters
configuration from high to low is “DHCP”, “AutoIP” and “ManualIP”. Therefore,
to enable the AutoIP configuration mode, “DHCP” and “AutoIP” must be set to
“Off”.
The three IP configuration modes cannot be set to “Off” at the same time.
After sending this command, the new settings will only take effect when
the :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:APPLy command is executed to apply the
current network parameters.
Return Format The query returns ON or OFF.
Example :SYST:COMM:LAN:STAT ON /*Turn on the ManualIP configuration mode*/
:SYST:COMM:LAN:STAT? /*Query the status of the ManualIP configuration
mode and the query returns ON */
Related
Command :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:APPLy
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:UPDate
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:UPDate
Description Store all the modifications of the LAN setting to the non-volatile memory and
restart the LAN drive program using the updated setting.
Explanation You must send this command after modifying the DHCP, DNS, gateway, host
name, IP address and subnet mask settings.
Please finish all the modifications of the LAN setting before sending this
command.
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:INFormation?
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:INFormation?
Description Query the USB information of the instrument.
Return Format The query returns a string, for
example, :USB0::0x1AB1::0x0642::DG1ZA000000001::INSTR.
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-198 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB[:SELF]:CLASs
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB[:SELF]:CLASs {COMPuter|PRINter}
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB[:SELF]:CLASs?
Description Set the type of the device connected to the USB Device interface at the rear panel
of the instrument to computer (COMPuter) or printer (PRINter).
Query the type of the device connected to the USB Device interface at the rear
panel of the instrument.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{COMPuter|PRINter} Discrete COMPuter|PRINter COMPuter
Explanation Please select COMPuter or PRINter according to the device currently connected to
the USB Device interface at the rear panel of the instrument.
Return Format The query returns COMP or PRIN.
Example :SYST:COMM:USB:CLAS PRIN /*Set the type of the device connected to the USB
Device interface at the rear panel of the
instrument to printer*/
:SYST:COMM:USB:CLAS? /*Query the type of the device connected to the
USB Device interface at the rear panel of the
instrument and the query returns PRIN*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-199
:SYSTem:CSCopy
Syntax :SYSTem:CSCopy <name>,<name>
Description Copy all the parameters and states (except the channel output on/off state) as well
as the arbitrary waveform data of a channel to the other channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<name> Discrete CH1|CH2 None
Explanation When the channel coupling function
(:COUPling:AMPL[:STATe], :COUPling:FREQuency[:STATe], :COUPling:PHASe[
:STATe] or :COUPling[:STATe]) or track function ([:SOURce[<n>]]:TRACK) is
turned on, the channel copy function is not available.
The two <name> parameters cannot be the same, namely <name>,<name>
can be CH1,CH2 or CH2,CH1.
CH1,CH2: copy all the parameters and states (except the channel output
on/off state) as well as the arbitrary waveform data of CH1 to CH2.
CH2,CH1: copy all the parameters and states (except the channel output
on/off state) as well as the arbitrary waveform data of CH2 to CH1.
Example :SYST:CSC CH1,CH2 /*Copy all the parameters and states (except the channel
output on/off state) as well as the arbitrary waveform
data of CH1 to CH2.*/
Related
Commands :COUPling:AMPL[:STATe]
:COUPling:FREQuency[:STATe]
:COUPling:PHASe[:STATe]
:COUPling[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:TRACK
:SYSTem:ERRor?
Syntax :SYSTem:ERRor?
Description Query and clear an error message in the error queue.
Explanation The error will be cleared when you read the error queue. You can also clear the
error queue using the *CLS command (clear the status) or *RST command (restore
the instrument to its factory state) or by turning on/off the instrument.
Return Format The query returns a string consisting of two parts separated by commas. The first
part is the number of the error message and the second part is the content of the
error message; wherein, the content is a string enclosed in double quotation marks.
For example, -113,"Undefined header; keyword cannot be found"; wherein, -113
is the number of the error message and Undefined header; keyword cannot
be found (the content enclosed in the double quotation marks) is the content of
the error message.
Related
Commands *CLS
*RST
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-200 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SYSTem:KLOCk
Syntax :SYSTem:KLOCk <key>,{ON|1|OFF|0}
:SYSTem:KLOCk? <key>
Description Lock or unlock the specified key or knob at the front panel.
Query whether the specified key or knob at the front panel is locked.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
<key> Discrete Refer to the
“Explanation” None
{ON|1|OFF|0} Bool ON|1|OFF|0 OFF
Explanation <key> is used to specify the key and the range is as following:
MOD|SWEEP|BURST|STORE|UTILITY|HELP| /*Function keys*/
SINE|SQUARE|RAMP|PULSE|NOISE|ARB| /*Waveform keys*/
M1|M2|M3|M4|M5|PAGE|
/*Menu softkeys and menu page
up/down key*/
NUM0|NUM1|NUM2|NUM3|NUM4|NUM5|
NUM6|NUM7|NUM8|NUM9|DOT|SIGN| /*Numeric keyboard*/
LEFT|RIGHT|KNOB|
/*Direction keys and knob*/
OUTPUt1|OUTPUt2|CH|
/*Output control keys and chann
switch key*/
RETURN|
/*Return the previous menu key
COUNTER|
/*Counter key*/
ALL
/*All the keys and knob at the fr
panel*/
{ON|OFF|0|1} is used to lock or unlock the keys. ON|1 denotes locking the
specified key and OFF|0 denotes unlocking the specified key.
DG1000Z allows users to lock the specified key or knob at the front panel to
avoid the danger caused by mis-operation. When the key is locked, it can only
be unlocked by sending this command and cannot be unlock by front panel
operation.
Return Format The query returns 1 or 0.
Example :SYST:KLOC MOD,1 /*Lock the MOD key at the front panel*/
:SYST:KLOC? MOD /*The query returns 1*/
:SYST:KLOC MOD,OFF /*Unlock the MOD key at the front panel*/
:SYST:KLOC? MOD /*The query returns 0*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-201
:SYSTem:LANGuage
Syntax :SYSTem:LANGuage {ENGLish|SCHinese}
:SYSTem:LANGuage?
Description Set the system language to English (ENGLish) or simplified Chinese ( SCHinese ).
Query the system language.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{ENGLish|SCHinese} Discrete ENGLish|SCHinese SCHinese
Return Format The query returns ENGL or SCH.
Example :SYST:LANG SCH /*Set the system language to simplified Chinese*/
:SYST:LANG? /*Query the system language and the query returns SCH*/
:SYSTem:POWeron
Syntax :SYSTem:POWeron {DEFault|LAST}
:SYSTem:POWeron?
Description Set the power-on state to default (DEFault) or last (LAST).
Query the power-on state.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{DEFault|LAST} Discrete DEFault|LAST DEFault
Explanation DEFault: the factory default values, except the parameters (such as the
language) that will not be affected by the reset operation. For the details,
please refer to “Appendix B: Factory Setting”.
LAST: include all the system parameters and states (except the channel output
on/off state and the clock source).
Return Format The query returns DEFAULT or LAST.
Example :SYST:POW LAST /*Set the power-on state to last*/
:SYST:POW? /*Query the power-on state and the query returns LAST*/
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-202 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SYSTem:PRESet
Syntax :SYSTem:PRESet
{DEFault|USER1|USER2|USER3|USER4|USER5|USER6|USER7|USER8|
USER9|USER10}
Description Restore the instrument to the default state (DEFault) or recall the specified
user-stored state file (USER1 to USER10) in the internal memory of the instrument.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{DEFault|USER1|USER2|
USER3|USER4|USER5|
USER6|USER7|USER8|
USER9|USER10}
Discrete
DEFault|USER1|USER2|
USER3|USER4|USER5|
USER6|USER7|USER8|
USER9|USER10
None
Explanation USER1 to USER10 denotes the files stored in the state file storage locations 1 to 10
in the internal memory of the instrument respectively. The state file can only be
recalled when the specified storage location in the internal memory contains a state
file.
Example Assume that the state file storage location 1 in the internal memory of the
instrument contains a state file,
:SYSTem:PRESet USER1 /*Recall the state file stored in the state file storage
location 1 in the internal memory of the
instrument*/
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-203
:SYSTem:ROSCillator:SOURce
Syntax :SYSTem:ROSCillator:SOURce {INTernal|EXTernal}
:SYSTem:ROSCillator:SOURce?
Description Set the system clock source to internal source (INTernal) or external source
(EXTernal).
Query the system clock source type.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
{INTernal|EXTernal} Discrete INTernal|EXTernal INTernal
Explanation DG1000Z provides an internal 10MHz clock source and accepts external clock
source from the [10MHz In/Out] connector at the rear panel. It can also
output clock source from the [10MHz In/Out] connector for other devices.
If external clock source is selected, the instrument will detect whether a valid
external clock signal is inputted from the [10MHz Out/In] connector at the
rear panel. If no valid clock source is detected, the corresponding prompt
message would be displayed and the clock source would be switched to
internal.
You can synchronize two or more instruments by setting the clock source.
Synchronization between two instruments:
Connect the output of the [10MHz In/Out] connector of instrument A (set
the clock source to “Internal”) to the [10MHz In/Out] connector of
instrument B (set the clock source to “External”) and set the output
frequencies of instruments A and B as a same value to realize synchronization
between the two instruments.
Synchronization among multiple instruments:
Divide the 10MHz clock source of a instrument (set the clock source to
“Internal”) into multiple instruments, and then connect them to the [10MHz
In/Out] connectors of other generators (set the clock source to “External”)
respectively, and finally set the output frequencies of all the instruments as a
same value to realize synchronization among the multiple instruments.
Return Format The query returns INT or EXT.
Example :SYST:ROSC:SOUR INT /*Set the system clock source to internal*/
:SYST:ROSC:SOUR? /*Query the system clock source and the query returns
INT*/
:SYSTem:SECurity:IMMediate
Syntax :SYSTem:SECurity:IMMediate
Description Sanitizes all the user-accessible instrument memory information.
Explanation This command sanitizes all the user-defined state information, arbitrary waveforms
and I/O settings (such as the IP address) as well as restores the instrument settings
to the factory values.
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-204 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SYSTem:VERSion?
Syntax :SYSTem:VERSion?
Description Query the system SCPI version information.
Return Format The query returns a string in YYYY.V form; wherein, YYYY denotes the year of the
version and V denotes the edition in that year. For example, 1999.0.
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-205
:TRIGger Commands
The :TRIGger commands are used to set the trigger source type, trigger input edge type and trigger delay
as well as generate a trigger event.
Command List:
:TRIGger[<n>]:DELay
:TRIGger[<n>][:IMMediate]
:TRIGger[<n>]:SLOPe
:TRIGger[<n>]:SOURce
:TRIGger[<n>]:DELay
Syntax :TRIGger[<n>]:DELay {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:TRIGger[<n>]:DELay? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Description Set the burst delay of the specified channel.
Query the burst delay of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Integer 1|2 1
<seconds> Real Refer to the “Explanation” 0s
Explanation The burst delay refers to the time from when the signal generator receives the
trigger signal to when it starts to output the N cycle or infinite burst. It is only
applicable to the N cycle and infinite burst modes.
For the N cycle or infinite burst mode in external trigger or manual trigger
([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SOURce), the range of <delay> is from 0s to
100s.
For the N cycle burst mode in internal trigger, the range of <delay> is from 0s to
(
2us−×− cyclewaveformburst NPP
) and the burst delay must be lower than or equal
to 100s.
Wherein,
burst
P
——burst period;
waveform
P
——waveform period (period of the burst function (such as
sine and square) ;
cycle
N
——number of cycles.
When [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the burst delay of CH1 by default.
Return Format The query returns the burst delay in scientific notation with 7 effective digits, for
example, 1.000000E+00 (the burst delay is 1s).
Example :TRIG:DEL 1 /*Set the burst delay of CH1 to 1s*/
:TRIG:DEL? /*Query the burst delay of CH1 and the query returns
1.000000E+00*/
Related
Command [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SOURce
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-206 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:TRIGger[<n>][:IMMediate]
Syntax :TRIGger[<n>] [:IMMediate]
Description Generate a trigger in the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
Explanation This command is only applicable to the burst output
([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]) or sweep output
([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe) in manual trigger
(:TRIGger[<n>]:SOURce).
When [<n>] is omitted, the system generates a trigger in CH1 by default.
The trigger will be ignored if the output of the corresponding channel is not
turned on.
Example :TRIG1 /*Generate a trigger in CH1*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe
:TRIGger[<n>]:SOURce
Chapter 2 Command System RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 2-207
:TRIGger[<n>]:SLOPe
Syntax :TRIGger[<n>]:SLOPe {POSitive|NEGative}
:TRIGger[<n>]:SLOPe?
Description Set the edge type of the trigger input signal of the specified channel to rising edge
(POSitive) or falling edge (NEGative).
Query the edge type of the trigger input signal of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{POSitive|NEGative} Discrete POSitive|NEGative POSitive
Explanation This command is only applicable to the burst (N cycle, infinite or gated) output
([:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]) or sweep output
([:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe) in external trigger
(:TRIGger[<n>]:SOURce). When external trigger is selected, the signal
generator receives the trigger signal inputted from the
[Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the corresponding channel at the rear
panel and initiates a burst output (N cycle, infinite or gated) or sweep output
each time a TTL pulse with the specified polarity is received.
When [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related parameters of CH1 by
default.
Return Format The query returns POS or NEG.
Example :TRIG1:SLOP NEG /*Set the edge type of the trigger input signal of CH1 to
falling edge*/
:TRIG1:SLOP? /*Query the edge type of the trigger input signal of CH1 and
the query returns NEG*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe
:TRIGger[<n>]:SOURce
RIGOL Chapter 2 Command System
2-208 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:TRIGger[<n>]:SOURce
Syntax :TRIGger[<n>]:SOURce {INTernal|EXTernal|BUS}
:TRIGger[<n>]:SOURce?
Description Set the trigger source of the specified channel to internal (INTernal), external
(EXTernal) or manual (MANual).
Query the trigger source of the specified channel.
Parameter Name Type Range Default
[<n>] Discrete 1|2 1
{INTernal|EXTernal|BUS} Discrete INTernal|EXTernal|BUS INTernal
Explanation This command is only applicable to the burst (N cycle, infinite or gated) output
or sweep output.
The N cycle burst and sweep mode support internal trigger. When internal
trigger is selected, the frequency of the N cycle burst is determined by the
“Burst Period” and the trigger period of the sweep waveform is determined by
the specified sweep time, return time, start hold and stop hold. You can also set
the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the corresponding channel at the
rear panel to output trigger signal with the specified edge type (rising edge or
falling edge) or turn off the trigger signal output.
The N cycle, infinite and gated bursts as well as the sweep mode all supports
external trigger. When external trigger is selected, the signal generator receives
the trigger signal inputted from the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the
corresponding channel at the rear panel and initiates a burst (N cycle, infinite or
gated) output or sweep output each time a TTL pulse with the specified polarity
is received. You can specify the edge type of the trigger input signal
(:TRIGger[<n>]:SLOPe).
The N cycle and infinite bursts as well as the sweep mode support manual
trigger. When manual trigger is selected and the output of the corresponding
channel is turned on, the instrument outputs N cycle burst or infinite burst
when the *TRG, :TRIGger[<n>][:IMMediate] or
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger[:IMMediate] command is sent; the
instrument initiates a sweep in the corresponding channel immediately each
time the *TRG, :TRIGger[<n>][:IMMediate] or
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger[:IMMediate] command is send. If the output
of the corresponding channel is not turned on, the trigger will be ignored. You
can also set the [Mod/Trig/FSK/Sync] connector of the corresponding
channel at the rear panel to output trigger signal with the specified edge type
(rising edge or falling edge) or turn off the trigger signal output.
When [<n>] is omitted, the system sets the related parameters of CH1 by
default.
Return Format The query returns INT, EXT or MAN.
Example :TRIG1:SOUR INT /*Set the trigger source of CH1 to internal*/
:TRIG1:SOUR? /*Query the trigger source p of CH1 and the query returns
INT*/
Related
Commands [:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger[:IMMediate]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger[:IMMediate]
*TRG
:TRIGger[<n>][:IMMediate]
:TRIGger[<n>]:SLOPe
Chapter 3 Application Examples RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 3-1
Chapter 3 Application Examples
This chapter provides some application examples of the SCPI commands. A series of SCPI commands are
combined to realize the main functions of the signal generator.
Note:
1. The examples in this chapter are based on DG1062Z. For other models, the ranges of some
parameters might be different. When using the commands, please make proper adjustment according
to the model of your instrument.
2. Before using the examples in this chapter, please select the desired communication interface (USB,
LAN or GPIB) and make correct connections (refer to the introductions in “To Build Remote
Communication”). Besides, you have to install Ultra Sigma or other PC software for sending
commands on your PC.
3. The content enclosed in “/*” and “*/” after each command in the examples of this chapter is
annotation for easier understanding and is not a part of the command.
Main topics of this chapter:
To Output Basic Waveform
To Output Arbitrary Waveform
To Output Harmonic Waveform
To Output AM Modulated Waveform
To Output FSK Modulated Waveform
To Output Sweep Waveform
To Output Burst Waveform
To Use the Frequency Counter Function
RIGOL Chapter 3 Application Examples
3-2 DG1000Z Programming Guide
To Output Basic Waveform
Requirement
Use the SCPI commands to realize the following functions:
Output a sine from the output connector of CH1 at the front panel: 500Hz frequency, 2.5Vpp amplitude,
1VDC offset and 90° start phase.
Method 1
1. *IDN? /*Query the ID string of the signal generator to check whether
the remote communication is normal*/
2. :SOUR1:APPL:SIN 500,2.5,1,90 /*Set the waveform of CH1 to sine, the frequency to 500Hz,
the amplitude to 2.5Vpp, the offset to 1VDC and the start
phase to 90°*/
3.
:OUTP1 ON
/*Turn on the output of CH1*/
Method 2
1.
*IDN?
/*Query the ID string of the signal generator to check whether
the remote communication is normal*/
2. :SOUR1:FUNC SIN /*Set the waveform of CH1 to sine*/
3. :SOUR1:FREQ 500 /*Set the waveform frequency of CH1 to 500Hz*/
4. :SOUR1:VOLT 2.5 /*Set the waveform amplitude of CH1 to 2.5Vpp*/
5. :SOUR1:VOLT:OFFS 1 /*Set the waveform offset voltage of CH1 to 1VDC*/
6.
:SOUR1:PHAS 90
/*Set the waveform start phase of CH1 to 90°*/
7.
:OUTP1 ON
/*Turn on the output of CH1*/
To Output Arbitrary Waveform
Requirement
Use the SCPI commands to realize the following functions:
Output arbitrary waveform (volatile memory waveform) from the output connector of CH1 at the front
panel; select the sample rate output mode; set the frequency to 500Hz, the number of waveform points to
10 and the floating voltages to -0.6, -0.4, -0.3, -0.1, 0, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5 and 0.7.
Method
1. *IDN? /*Query the ID string of the signal generator to check whether
the remote communication is normal*/
2. :SOUR1:APPL:ARB 500 /*Set CH1 to output arbitrary waveform (sample rate output
mode) and the waveform frequency to 500Hz*/
3. :SOUR1:DATA VOLATILE,-0.6,-0.4,-0.3,-0.1,0,0.1,0.2,0.3,0.5,0.7
/*Download the floating voltages
-0.6,-0.4,-0.3,-0.1,0,0.1,0.2,0.3,0.5,0.7 to the volatile
memory of CH1*/
4.
:OUTP1 ON
/*Turn on the output of CH1*/
Chapter 3 Application Examples RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 3-3
To Output Harmonic Waveform
Requirement
Use the SCPI commands to realize the following functions:
Output harmonic waveform from the output connector of CH1 at the front panel; the fundamental
waveform (sine) parameters are 1kHz frequency, 5Vpp amplitude, 0VDC offset voltage and 0° start phase;
set the highest order of harmonic to 4, the harmonic type to even, the amplitude and phase of the second
order of harmonic to 2Vpp and 30°, the amplitude and phase of the forth order of harmonic to 1Vpp and
50°.
Method
1. *IDN? /*Query the ID string of the signal generator to check
whether the remote communication is normal*/
2.
:SOUR1:APPL:SIN 1000,5,0,0
/*Set the waveform of CH1 to sine, the frequency to 1kHz,
the amplitude to 5Vpp, the offset to 0VDC and the start
phase to 0°*/
3.
:SOUR1:HARM ON
/*Turn on the harmonic function of CH1*/
4.
:SOUR1:HARM:ORDE 4
/*Set the highest order of harmonic of CH1 to 4*/
5. :SOUR1:HARM:TYP EVEN /*Set the harmonic type of harmonic of CH1 to even*/
6. :SOUR1:HARM:AMPL 2,2 /*Set the amplitude of the second order of harmonic of CH1
to 2Vpp*/
7. :SOUR1:HARM:PHAS 2,30 /*Set the phase of the second order of harmonic of CH1 to
30°*/
8.
:SOUR1:HARM:AMPL 4,1
/*Set the amplitude of the forth order of harmonic of CH1 to
1Vpp*/
9.
:SOUR1:HARM:PHAS 4,50
/*Set the phase of the forth order of harmonic of CH1 to
50°*/
10.
:OUTP1 ON
/*Turn on the output of CH1*/
To Output AM Modulated Waveform
Requirement
Use the SCPI commands to realize the following functions:
Output AM modulated waveform from the output connector of CH1 at the front panel; set the carrier
waveform to sine (1kHz frequency, 5Vpp amplitude, 0VDC offset voltage and 0° start phase); select internal
modulation source; set the modulating waveform to sine, the modulation depth to 80% and the modulation
frequency to 200Hz; turn on the carrier waveform suppression function.
Method
1. *IDN? /*Query the ID string of the signal generator to check whether
the remote communication is normal*/
2. :SOUR1:APPL:SIN 1000,5,0,0 /*Set the waveform of CH1 to sine, the frequency to 1kHz, the
amplitude to 5Vpp, the offset to 0VDC and the start phase to
0*/
3. :SOUR1:AM:STAT ON /*Turn on the AM modulation function of CH1*/
4. :SOUR1:AM:SOUR INT /*Set the AM modulation source of CH1 to internal*/
5.
:SOUR1:AM:INT:FUNC SIN
/*Set the AM modulating waveform of CH1 to sine*/
6.
:SOUR1:AM 80
/*Set the AM modulation depth of CH1 to 80%*/
7. :SOUR1:AM:INT:FREQ 200 /*Set the AM modulation frequency of CH1 to 200Hz*/
8. :SOUR1:AM:DSSC ON /*Turn on the AM carrier waveform suppression function of
CH1*/
9. :OUTP1 ON /*Turn on the output of CH1*/
RIGOL Chapter 3 Application Examples
3-4 DG1000Z Programming Guide
To Output FSK Modulated Waveform
Requirement
Use the SCPI commands to realize the following functions:
Output FSK modulated waveform from the output connector of CH1 at the front panel; set the carrier
waveform to sine (1kHz frequency, 5Vpp amplitude, 0VDC offset voltage and 0° start phase); select external
modulation source; set the hop frequency to 2kHz and the modulation polarity to positive.
Method
1. *IDN? /*Query the ID string of the signal generator to check whether
the remote communication is normal*/
2. :SOUR1:APPL:SIN 1000,5,0,0 /*Set the waveform of CH1 to sine, the frequency to 1kHz, the
amplitude to 5Vpp, the offset to 0VDC and the start phase to
0°*/
3.
:SOUR1:FSK:STAT ON
/*Turn on the FSK modulation function of CH1*/
4.
:SOUR1:FSK:SOUR EXT
/*Set the FSK modulation source of CH1 to external */
5. :SOUR1:FSK 2000 /*Set the FSK hop frequency of CH1 to 2kHz */
6. :SOUR1:FSK:POL POS /*Set the FSK modulation polarity of CH1 to positive */
7. :OUTP1 ON /*Turn on the output of CH1*/
Chapter 3 Application Examples RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 3-5
To Output Sweep Waveform
Requirement
Use the SCPI commands to realize the following functions:
Output sweep waveform from the output connector of CH1 at the front panel; set the sweep waveform to
sine (5Vpp amplitude and 0VDC offset voltage), the sweep type to linear, the sweep time to 3s, the return
time to 0.1s, the start frequency to 100Hz and the stop frequency to 1kHz; turn on the frequency mark
function and set the mark frequency to 500Hz, the start hold to 0.1s, the stop hold to 0.1s, the trigger
source to manual and the edge type of the trigger output signal to rising edge.
Method
1. *IDN? /*Query the ID string of the signal generator to check
whether the remote communication is normal*/
2.
:SOUR1:FUNC SIN
/*Set the waveform of CH1 to sine*/
3.
:SOUR1:VOLT 5
/*Set the waveform amplitude of CH1 to 5Vpp*/
4. :SOUR1:VOLT:OFFS 0 /*Set the waveform offset voltage of CH1 to 0VDC*/
5. :SOUR1:SWE:STAT ON /*Turn on the sweep function of CH1*/
6. :SOUR1:SWE:SPAC LIN /*Set the sweep type of CH1 to linear*/
7. :SOUR1:SWE:TIME 3 /*Set the sweep time of CH1 to 3s*/
8. :SOUR1:SWE:RTIM 0.1 /*Set the return time of the sweep function of CH1 to 0.1s*/
9.
:SOUR1:FREQ:STAR 100
/*Set the start frequency of the sweep function of CH1 to
100Hz*/
10.
:SOUR1:FREQ:STOP 1000
/*Set the stop frequency of the sweep function of CH1 to
1kHz*/
11. :SOUR1:MARK ON /*Enable the frequency mark function of the sweep function
of CH1*/
12. :SOUR1:MARK:FREQ 500 /*Set the mark frequency of the sweep function of CH1 to
500Hz*/
13. :SOUR1:SWE:HTIM:STAR 0.1 /*Set the start hold of the sweep function of CH1 to 0.1s*/
14. :SOUR1:SWE:HTIM 0.1 /*Set the stop hold of the sweep function of CH1 to 0.1s*/
15. :SOUR1:SWE:TRIG:SOUR MAN /*Set the sweep trigger source of CH1 to manual*/
16.
:SOUR1:SWE:TRIG:TRIGO POS
/*Set the edge type of the trigger output signal of CH1 to
rising edge*/
17.
:OUTP1 ON
/*Turn on the output of CH1*/
18. :SOUR1:SWE:TRIG /*Trigger a sweep in CH1 immediately*/
RIGOL Chapter 3 Application Examples
3-6 DG1000Z Programming Guide
To Output Burst Waveform
Requirement
Use the SCPI commands to realize the following functions:
Output burst waveform from the output connector of CH1 at the front panel; set the burst waveform to sine
(1kHz frequency, 5Vpp amplitude, 0VDC offset voltage and 0° start phase), the burst type to N cycle, the
number of cycles to 10, the burst time to 0.1s, the trigger source to internal, the trigger output signal to
falling edge and the trigger delay to 0.01s.
Method
1. *IDN? /*Query the ID string of the signal generator to check
whether the remote communication is normal*/
2. :SOUR1:APPL:SIN 1000,5,0,0 /*Set the waveform of CH1 to sine, the frequency to 1kHz,
the amplitude to 5Vpp, the offset to 0VDC and the start
phase to 0°*/
3.
:SOUR1:BURS ON
/*Turn on the burst function of CH1*/
4.
:SOUR1:BURS:MODE TRIG
/*Set the burst type of CH1 to N cycle*/
5. :SOUR1:BURS:NCYC 10 /*Set the number of cycles of the N cycle burst of CH1 to 10*/
6. :SOUR1:BURS:INT:PER 0.1 /*Set the internal burst period of the N cycle burst of CH1 to
0.1s*/
7. :SOUR1:BURS:TRIG:SOUR INT /*Set the trigger source of the burst mode of CH1 to
internal*/
8. :SOUR1:BURS:TRIG:TRIGO NEG /*Set the edge type of the trigger output signal of the burst
mode of CH1 to falling edge*/
9.
:SOUR1:BURS:TDEL 0.01
/*Set the trigger delay of the N cycle burst of CH1 to 0.01s*/
10.
:OUTP1 ON
/*Turn on the output of CH1*/
11.
:SOUR1:BURS:TRIG
/*Trigger a burst output in CH1 immediately*/
To Use the Frequency Counter Function
Requirement
Use the SCPI commands to realize the following functions:
Enable the frequency counter function; set the instrument to select the proper gate time automatically
according to the characteristic of the signal to be measured; turn on the statistic function; set the display
mode of the statistic results to number, the sensitivity to 30%, the trigger level to 0.1V and the coupling
mode to AC coupling; turn on the high-frequency rejection function; set the running state to run.
Method
1. *IDN? /*Query the ID string of the signal generator to check
whether the remote communication is normal*/
2. :COUN ON /*Turn on the frequency counter function*/
3. :COUN:AUTO /*Set the instrument to select the proper gate time according
to the characteristic of the signal to be measured*/
4.
:COUN:STATI ON
/*Turn on the statistic function of the measurement results of
the frequency counter*/
5.
:COUN:STATI:DISP DIGITAL
/*Set the display mode of the statistic results of the
measurement results of the frequency counter to number*/
6.
:COUN:SENS 30
/*Set the trigger sensitivity of the frequency counter to
30%*/
7. :COUN:LEVE 0.1 /*Set the trigger level of the frequency counter to 0.1V*/
8. :COUN:COUP AC /*Set the coupling mode of the input signal to AC coupling*/
9. :COUN:HF ON /*Turn on the high-frequency rejection function of the
frequency counter*/
10. :COUN RUN /*Set the running state of the frequency counter to run*/
Chapter 4 Programming Demos RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 4-1
Chapter 4 Programming Demos
This chapter provides the demos for programming and controlling the signal generator using SCPI
commands under Excel, Matlab, LabVIEW, Visual Basic and Visual C++ environments on the basis of
NI-VISA.
NI-VISA (National Instrument-Virtual Instrument Software Architecture) is an advanced application
programming interface developed by NI (National Instrument) for communicating with various instrument
buses. It can communicate with instrument in the same method regardless of the type of the instrument
interface (GPIB, USB, LAN/Ethernet or RS232).
The instruments which communicate with NI-VISA via various interfaces are called “resources”. The VISA
descriptor (namely the resource name) is used to describe the accurate name and location of the VISA
resource. If LAN interface is currently used for communicating with the instrument, the VISA descriptor
is :TCPIP0::172.16.2.13::INSTR. Before programming, please acquire the correct VISA descriptor.
Main topics of this chapter:
Programming Preparations
Excel Programming Demo
Matlab Programming Demo
LabVIEW Programming Demo
Visual Basic Programming Demo
Visual C++ Programming Demo
RIGOL Chapter 4 Programming Demos
4-2 DG1000Z Programming Guide
Programming Preparations
Before programming, you need to make the following preparations:
1 Install the Ultra Sigma common PC software. Please download the software from www.rigol.com and
install it according to the instructions. After installing Ultra Sigma, the NI-VISA library is installed
automatically. Here, the default installation path is C:\Program Files\IVI Foundation\VISA.
2 Here, the USB DEVICCE interface of the signal generator is used to communicate with the PC. Please
use USB cable to connect the USB DEVICE interface at the rear panel of the signal generator to the PC.
You can also use LAN or GPIB interface to communicate with the PC.
3 Power on the instrument after connecting the signal generator and PC correctly.
4 At this point, the "Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box appears on the PC. Please follow the
instructions to install the " USB Test and Measurement Device (IVI)" (refer to “To Control via USB” in
Chapter 3 “Remote Control” in the
DG1000Z User’s Guide
).
5 Acquire the USB VISA descriptor of the signal generator: press Utility I/O Config and the USB ID
is displayed at the center of the interface, as shown in the figure below. Here, the USB ID of the signal
generator is USB0::0x1AB1::0x0642::DG1ZA000000001::INSTR.
By now, the programming preparations are finished.
Chapter 4 Programming Demos RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 4-3
Excel Programming Demo
The program used in this demo: Microsoft Excel 2010
The function realized in this demo: send the *IDN? Command to read the device information.
1 Create a new Excel file that enables the Macros. In this demo, the file is named as
DG1000Z_Demo_Excel.xlsm.
2 Run the DG1000Z_Demo_Excel.xlsm file. Click “File Options” at the upper-left corner of the Excel
file to open the interface as shown in the figure below. Click “Customize Ribbon” at the left, check
“Developer” and click “OK”. At this point, the Excel menu bar displays the “Developer” menu.
3 Enter the USB ID into a cell of the file as shown in the figure below. Click the “Developer” menu and
select the “Visual Basic” option to open the Microsoft Visual Basic.
4 Select “Tools(T)” in the Microsoft Visual Basic menu bar and click “References”.
Select “VISA Library” in the pop-up dialog box and click “OK” to refer to the VISA Library.
RIGOL Chapter 4 Programming Demos
4-4 DG1000Z Programming Guide
Explanation:
If you cannot find VISA Library in the list at the left of the figure above, please follow the method
below to find it.
(1) Make sure that your PC has installed the NI-VISA library.
(2) Click “Browse…” at the right to search. The search range is C:\WINDOWS\system32 and the
filename to visa32.dll, as shown in the figure below.
5 Click “View Code” in the “Developer” menu to enter the Microsoft Visual Basic interface. Add the
following codes (the parts in green are the explanations) to the DG1000Z_Demo_Excel.xlsm – Sheet1
(code) window and save the file.
Sub QueryIdn()
Dim viDefRm As Long
Dim viDevice As Long
Dim viErr As Long
Dim cmdStr As String
Dim idnStr As String * 128
Dim ret As Long
‘Turn on the device, the device resource descriptor is in CELLS(1,2) of SHEET1’
viErr = visa.viOpenDefaultRM(viDefRm)
viErr = visa.viOpen(viDefRm, Sheet1.Cells(1, 2), 0, 5000, viDevice)
‘Send request, read the data, the return value is in CELLS(2,2) of SHEET1’
cmdStr = "*IDN?"
viErr = visa.viWrite(viDevice, cmdStr, Len(cmdStr), ret)
viErr = visa.viRead(viDevice, idnStr, 128, ret)
Sheet1.Cells(2, 2) = idnStr
‘Turn off the device’
visa.viClose (viDevice)
visa.viClose (viDefRm)
End Sub
Note: If the Excel file created at step 2 does not enable the Macros, at this point, the prompt message
“The following features cannot be saved in macro-free workbooks” will be displayed. In this situation,
please save the Excel file as a file using the Macros.
Chapter 4 Programming Demos RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 4-5
6 Add button control: click “Insert” in the “Developer menu”, select the desired button in “Form Controls”
and click a cell of the Excel to put the button into the cell. At this point, the “Assign Macro” interface is
displayed, select “Sheet1.QueryIdn” and click “OK”.
By default, the button name is “Button 1”. Right-click the button and select “Edit Text” in the pop-up
menu to change the button name to “*IDN?”.
7 Click “*IDN?” button inserted into the Excel file in the last step to run the program and the device
information is returned.
RIGOL Chapter 4 Programming Demos
4-6 DG1000Z Programming Guide
Matlab Programming Demo
The program used in this demo: MATLAB R2009a
The function realized in this demo: query the current waveform type as well as the waveform
frequency, amplitude, offset and phase of CH1.
1. Run the Matlab software and modify the current directory (namely modify the Current Directory at the
top of the software). In this demo, the current directory is modified to E:\DG1000Z_Demo_Matlab.
2. Click File New Blank M-File in the Matlab interface to create an empty M file.
3. Add the following codes in the M file:
dg1000z = visa( 'ni','USB0::0x1AB1::0x0642::DG1ZA000000001::INSTR' ); %Create VISA object
fopen(dg1000z); %Open the VISA object created
fprintf(dg1000z, ':SOURce1:APPLy?' ); %Send request
query_CH1 = fscanf(dg1000z); %Query data
fclose(dg1000z); %Close the VISA object
display(query_CH1) %Display the device information read
4. Save the M file under the current directory. In this demo, the M file is named as
DG1000Z_Demo_MATLAB.m.
5. Run the M file. The following running result is displayed in the command window.
Chapter 4 Programming Demos RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 4-7
LabVIEW Programming Demo
The program used in this demo: LabVIEW 2009
The functions realized in this demo: search for the instrument address, connect the instrument, send
command and read the return value.
1 Run LabVIEW 2009, create a VI file and name it as DG1000Z_Demo_LABVIEW.
2 Add controls in the front panel interface, including the Address bar, Command bar and Return bar as
well as the Connect, Write, Read and Exit buttons.
RIGOL Chapter 4 Programming Demos
4-8 DG1000Z Programming Guide
3 Click “Show Block Diagram” in the Window menu to create event structure.
Chapter 4 Programming Demos RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 4-9
4 Add events, including connecting instrument, write operation, read operation and exit.
(1) Connect the instrument (including error processing):
RIGOL Chapter 4 Programming Demos
4-10 DG1000Z Programming Guide
Chapter 4 Programming Demos RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 4-11
(2) Write operation (including error judgment):
RIGOL Chapter 4 Programming Demos
4-12 DG1000Z Programming Guide
(3) Read operation (including error processing):
Chapter 4 Programming Demos RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 4-13
(4) Exit:
5 Run the program and the interface as shown in the figure below is displayed. Click the “Address”
dropdown box and select the VISA resource name; click “Connect” to connect the instrument; enter
the command into the “Command” textbox and click “Write” to write the command into the instrument.
If the command is a query command, click “Read” and the return value is displayed in the “Return”
textbox.
RIGOL Chapter 4 Programming Demos
4-14 DG1000Z Programming Guide
Visual Basic Programming Demo
The program used in this demo: Visual Basic 6.0
The function realized in this demo: enable the two channels of the signal generator and show the
corresponding colors of the channels.
1 Run Visual Basic 6.0, build a standard application program project (Standard EXE) and name it as
DG1000Z_Demo_VB.
2 Click the Existing tab of ProjectAdd Module. Search for the visa32.bas file in the include folder under
the NI-VISA installation path and add the file.
3 Add two Command Button controls to represent CH1 and CH2 respectively. Add two Label controls
(Label1(0) and Label1(1)) to represent the status of the two channels respectively (by default, the Text
control is gray; when the channel is enabled, it displays the corresponding color of the channel). The
layout of the controls is as shown in the figure below.
Chapter 4 Programming Demos RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 4-15
4 Open the “General” tab in Project Project1 Properties and select “Form1” in the “Startup Object”
dropdown box.
5 Double-click the CH1 button to enter the programming environment. Add the following codes to
control CH1 and CH2. The codes of CH1 are as shown below; the codes of CH2 are similar.
Dim defrm As Long
Dim vi As Long
Dim strRes As String * 200
Dim list As Long
Dim nmatches As Long
Dim matches As String * 200
' Acquire the usb resource of visa
Call viOpenDefaultRM(defrm)
Call viFindRsrc(defrm, "USB?*", list, nmatches, matches)
' Turn on the device
Call viOpen(defrm, matches, 0, 0, vi)
' Send command to query the CH1 status
Call viVPrintf(vi, ":OUTP1?" + Chr$(10), 0)
' Acquire the status of CH1
Call viVScanf(vi, "%t", strRes)
If strRes = "ON" Then
' Send the setting command
Call viVPrintf(vi, ":OUTP1 OFF" + Chr$(10), 0)
Label1(0).ForeColor = &H808080 'Gray
Else
Call viVPrintf(vi, ":OUTP1 ON" + Chr$(10), 0)
RIGOL Chapter 4 Programming Demos
4-16 DG1000Z Programming Guide
Label1(0).ForeColor = &HFFFF& 'Yellow
End If
' Turn off the resource
Call viClose(vi)
Call viClose(defrm)
6 Run the program and view the results, as shown in the figures below.
1) Click the CH1 button to enable CH1 and the control above CH1 turns yellow;
2) Click the CH2 button to enable CH2 and the control above CH2 turns blue.
The running results are as shown in the figure below.
Chapter 4 Programming Demos RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 4-17
Visual C++ Programming Demo
The program used in this demo: Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0
The functions realized in this demo: search for the instrument address, connect the instrument, send
command and read the return value.
1 Run Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0, create a MFC project based on dialog box and name it as
DG1000Z_Demo_VC.
2 Click ProjectSettings and add visa32.lib in the “Link” tab in the pop-up interface manually.
RIGOL Chapter 4 Programming Demos
4-18 DG1000Z Programming Guide
3 Click ToolsOptions.
Add the Include and Lib paths in the “Directories” tab in the pop-up interface.
Note:
The two pathes added here are related to the NI-VISA installation path on your PC. Here, the NI-VISA
is installed under C:\Program Files\IVI Foundation\VISA.
Select Include files in “Show directories for” and double-click the blank in “Directories” to add the path
of Include: C:\Program Files\IVI Foundation\VISA\WinNT\include.
Chapter 4 Programming Demos RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 4-19
Select Library files in “Show directories for” and double-click the blank in “Directories” to add the path
of Lib: C:\Program Files\IVI Foundation\VISA\WinNT\lib\msc.
4 Add the Text, Edit and Button controls and the layout is as shown in the figure below. Wherein,
Address, Command and Return are Text controls; Connect, Send and Read are Button controls; the
three Edit are Edit conrols and the third Edit control are read-only.
Read-only
RIGOL Chapter 4 Programming Demos
4-20 DG1000Z Programming Guide
5 Click ViewClassWizard and add the control variables in the “Member Variables” tab in the pop-up
interface.
Instrument address: CString m_strInstrAddr
Command: CString m_strCommand
Return value: CString m_strResult
6 Encapsulate the write and read operations of VISA.
1) Encapsulate the write operation of VISA for easier operation.
bool CDG1000Z_Demo_VCDlg::InstrWrite(CString strAddr, CString strContent) //write function
{ ViSession defaultRM,instr;
ViStatus status;
ViUInt32 retCount;
char * SendBuf = NULL;
char * SendAddr = NULL;
bool bWriteOK = false;
CString str;
//Change the address's data style from CString to char*
SendAddr = strAddr.GetBuffer(strAddr.GetLength());
strcpy(SendAddr,strAddr);
strAddr.ReleaseBuffer();
//Change the command's data style from CString to char*
SendBuf = strContent.GetBuffer(strContent.GetLength());
strcpy(SendBuf,strContent);
strContent.ReleaseBuffer();
//open the VISA instrument
status = viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
if (status < VI_SUCCESS)
{
AfxMessageBox("No VISA instrument was opened !");
Chapter 4 Programming Demos RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 4-21
return false;
}
status = viOpen(defaultRM, SendAddr, VI_NULL, VI_NULL, &instr);
//write command to the instrument
status = viWrite(instr, (unsigned char *)SendBuf, strlen(SendBuf), &retCount);
//close the instrument
status = viClose(instr);
status = viClose(defaultRM);
return bWriteOK;
}
2) Encapsulate the read operation of VISA for easier operation.
bool CDG1000Z_Demo_VCDlg::InstrRead(CString strAddr, CString *pstrResult)
//Read from the instrument
{
ViSession defaultRM,instr;
ViStatus status;
ViUInt32 retCount;
char * SendAddr = NULL;
unsigned char RecBuf[MAX_REC_SIZE];
bool bReadOK = false;
CString str;
//Change the address's data style from CString to char*
SendAddr = strAddr.GetBuffer(strAddr.GetLength());
strcpy(SendAddr,strAddr);
strAddr.ReleaseBuffer();
memset(RecBuf,0,MAX_REC_SIZE);
//open the VISA instrument
status = viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
if (status < VI_SUCCESS)
{
// Error Initializing VISA...exiting
AfxMessageBox("No VISA instrument was opened !");
return false;
}
//open the instrument
status = viOpen(defaultRM, SendAddr, VI_NULL, VI_NULL, &instr);
//read from the instrument
status = viRead(instr, RecBuf, MAX_REC_SIZE, &retCount);
//close the instrument
status = viClose(instr);
status = viClose(defaultRM);
(*pstrResult).Format("%s",RecBuf);
return bReadOK;
}
RIGOL Chapter 4 Programming Demos
4-22 DG1000Z Programming Guide
7 Add the control message response code.
1) Connect the instrument
void CDG1000Z_Demo_VCDlg::OnConnect()
{
// TODO: Add your control notification handler code here
ViStatus status;
ViSession defaultRM;
ViString expr = "?*";
ViPFindList findList = new unsigned long;
ViPUInt32 retcnt = new unsigned long;
ViChar instrDesc[1000];
CString strSrc = "";
CString strInstr = "";
unsigned long i = 0;
bool bFindDP = false;
status = viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
if (status < VI_SUCCESS)
{
// Error Initializing VISA...exiting
MessageBox("No VISA instrument was opened ! ");
return ;
}
memset(instrDesc,0,1000);
// Find resource
status = viFindRsrc(defaultRM,expr,findList, retcnt, instrDesc);
for (i = 0;i < (*retcnt);i++)
{
// Get instrument name
strSrc.Format("%s",instrDesc);
InstrWrite(strSrc,"*IDN?");
::Sleep(200);
InstrRead(strSrc,&strInstr);
// If the instrument(resource) belongs to the DP series then jump out from the loop
strInstr.MakeUpper();
if (strInstr.Find("DG") >= 0)
{
bFindDP = true;
m_strInstrAddr = strSrc;
break;
}
//Find next instrument
status = viFindNext(*findList,instrDesc);
}
if (bFindDP == false)
{
MessageBox("Didn't find any DG!");
}
UpdateData(false);
}
Chapter 4 Programming Demos RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 4-23
2) Write operation
void CDG1000Z_Demo_VCDlg::OnSend()
{
// TODO: Add your control notification handler code here
UpdateData(true);
if (m_strInstrAddr.IsEmpty())
{
MessageBox("Please connect to the instrument first!");
}
InstrWrite(m_strInstrAddr,m_strCommand);
m_strResult.Empty();
UpdateData(false);
}
3) Read operation
void CDG1000Z_Demo_VCDlg::OnRead()
{
// TODO: Add your control notification handler code here
UpdateData(true);
InstrRead(m_strInstrAddr,&m_strResult);
UpdateData(false);
}
8 Run the program and enter the following operation interface.
Execute the following steps:
1) Click the Connect button to search for the signal generator and connect it;
2) Enter the command in to the Command textbox, for example, *IDN?;
3) Click the Send button to send the command;
4) Click the Read button to read the return value.
The running results are as shown in the figure below.
Chapter 5 Appendix RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 5-1
Chapter 5 Appendix
Appendix A: Command List
:COUNter Commands
:COUNter:AUTO
:COUNter:COUPling
:COUNter:GATEtime
:COUNter:HF
:COUNter:LEVEl
:COUNter:MEASure?
:COUNter:SENSitive
:COUNter[:STATe]
:COUNter:STATIstics:CLEAr
:COUNter:STATIstics:DISPlay
:COUNter:STATIstics[:STATe]
:COUPling Commands
:COUPling:AMPL:DEViation
:COUPling:AMPL:MODE
:COUPling:AMPL:RATio
:COUPling:AMPL[:STATe]
:COUPling:FREQuency:DEViation
:COUPling:FREQuency:MODE
:COUPling:FREQuency:RATio
:COUPling:FREQuency[:STATe]
:COUPling:PHASe:DEViation
:COUPling:PHASe:MODE
:COUPling:PHASe:RATio
:COUPling:PHASe[:STATe]
:COUPling[:STATe]
:DISPlay Commands
:DISPlay:BRIGhtness
:DISPlay:CONTrast
:DISPlay:DATA?
:DISPlay:MODE
:DISPlay:SAVer:IMMediate
:DISPlay:SAVer[:STATe]
RIGOL Chapter 5 Appendix
5-2 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:DISPlay[:STATe]
:DISPlay:TEXT?
:DISPlay:TEXT:CLEar
:DISPlay:TEXT[:SET]
:HCOPy Commands
:HCOPy:SDUMp:DATA?
:HCOPy:SDUMp:DATA:FORMat
IEEE488.2 Common Commands
*CLS
*ESE
*ESR?
*IDN?
*OPC
*OPT?
*PSC
*RCL
*RST
*SAV
*SRE
*STB?
*TRG
*WAI
:LICense Command
:LICense:INSTall
:LICense:SET
:LXI Commands
:LXI:IDENtify[:STATE]
:LXI:MDNS:ENABle
:LXI:MDNS:HNAMe
:LXI:MDNS:SNAMe:DESired
:LXI:MDNS:SNAMe[:RESolved]?
:LXI:RESet
:LXI:RESTart
:MEMory Commands
:MEMory:NSTates?
Chapter 5 Appendix RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 5-3
:MEMory:STATe:CATalog?
:MEMory:STATe:DELete
:MEMory:STATe:LOCK
:MEMory:STATe:NAME
:MEMory:STATe:RECall:AUTO
:MEMory:STATe:VALid?
:MMEMory Commands
:MMEMory:CATalog[:ALL]?
:MMEMory:CATalog:DATA:ARBitrary?
:MMEMory:CATalog:STATe?
:MMEMory:CDIRectory
:MMEMory:COPY
:MMEMory:DELete
:MMEMory:LOAD[:ALL]
:MMEMory:LOAD:DATA
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe
:MMEMory:MDIRectory
:MMEMory:RDIRectory?
:MMEMory:RDIRectory
:MMEMory:STORe[:ALL]
:MMEMory:STORe:DATA
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe
:OUTPut Commands
:OUTPut[<n>]:GATe:POLarity
:OUTPut[<n>]:IMPedance
:OUTPut[<n>]:LOAD
:OUTPut[<n>]:MODE
:OUTPut[<n>]:POLarity
:OUTPut[<n>][:STATe]
:OUTPut[<n>]:SYNC:DELay
:OUTPut[<n>]:SYNC:POLarity
:OUTPut[<n>]:SYNC[:STATe]
:PA Commands
:PA:GAIN
:PA:OFFSet[:STATe]
:PA:OFFSet:VALUe
:PA:OUTPut:POLarity
RIGOL Chapter 5 Appendix
5-4 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:PA:SAVE
:PA[:STATe]
:ROSCillator Commands
:ROSCillator:SOURce
:ROSCillator:SOURce:CURRent?
:SOURce Commands
:SOURce:APPLy Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy?
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:ARBitrary
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:DC
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:HARMonic
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:NOISe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:PULSe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:RAMP
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:SINusoid
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:SQUare
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:TRIangle
[:SOURce[<n>]]:APPLy:USER
:SOURce:BURSt Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:GATE:POLarity
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:INTernal:PERiod
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:MODE
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:NCYCles
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:PHASe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TDELay
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger[:IMMediate]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SLOPe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:TRIGger:TRIGOut
[:SOURce[<n>]]:BURSt:IDLE
:SOURce:FREQuency Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:CENTer
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:MODE
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:OFFSet
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle:RATio
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:COUPle[:STATe]
Chapter 5 Appendix RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 5-5
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency[:FIXed]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:SPAN
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STARt
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FREQuency:STOP
:SOURce:FUNCtion Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:ARBitrary:MODE
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:ARBitrary:SRATe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:DCYCle
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:HOLD
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:PERiod
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:TRANsition[:BOTH]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:TRANsition:LEADing
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:TRANsition:TRAiling
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:PULSe:WIDTh
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:DCYCle
[:SOURce[<n>]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:PERiod
:SOURce:HARMonic Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:AMPL
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:ORDEr
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:PHASe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:TYPe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:HARMonic:USER
:SOURce:MARKer Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:MARKer:FREQuency
[:SOURce[<n>]]:MARKer[:STATe]
:SOURce[:MOD]:AM Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM[:DEPTh]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:DSSC
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:AM:STATe
RIGOL Chapter 5 Appendix
5-6 DG1000Z Programming Guide
:SOURce[:MOD]:ASKey Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:AMPLitude
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:INTernal[:RATE]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:POLarity
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:ASKey:STATe
:SOURce[:MOD]:FM Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM[:DEViation]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:INTernal:FREQuency
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FM:STATe
:SOURce[:MOD]:FSKey Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey[:FREQuency]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:INTernal:RATE
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:POLarity
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:FSKey:STATe
:SOURce[:MOD]:PM Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM[:DEViation]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:INTernal:FREQuency
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PM:STATe
:SOURce[:MOD]:PSKey Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:INTernal:RATE
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:PHASe
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:POLarity
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PSKey:STATe
:SOURce[:MOD]:PWM Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM[:DEViation]:DCYCle
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM[:DEViation][:WIDTh]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:INTernal:FREQuency
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]][:MOD]:PWM:STATe
Chapter 5 Appendix RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 5-7
:SOURce:MOD Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:MOD[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:MOD:TYPe
:SOURce:PERiod Command
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PERiod[:FIXed]
:SOURce:PHASe Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PHASe[:ADJust]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PHASe:INITiate
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PHASe:SYNChronize
:SOURce:PULSe Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:DCYCle
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:HOLD
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:TRANsition[:LEADing]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:TRANsition:TRAiling
[:SOURce[<n>]]:PULSe:WIDTh
:SOURce:SUM Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM:AMPLitude
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM:INTernal:FREQuency
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM:INTernal:FUNCtion
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SUM[:STATe]
:SOURce:SWEep Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:HTIMe:STARt
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:HTIMe[:STOP]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:RTIMe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:SPACing
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STATe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:STEP
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TIME
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger[:IMMediate]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SLOPe
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:SOURce
[:SOURce[<n>]]:SWEep:TRIGger:TRIGOut
:SOURce:TRACe Commands
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:CATalog?
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:COPY
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:DAC16
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:DAC
RIGOL Chapter 5 Appendix
5-8 DG1000Z Programming Guide
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA[:DATA]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:DELete[:NAME]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:LOAD
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:LOCK[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:POINts
[:SOURce[<n>]][:TRACe]:DATA:VALue
:SOURce:TRACK Command
[:SOURce[<n>]]:TRACK
:SOURce:VOLTage Comamnds
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage:COUPle[:STATe]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:HIGH
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LOW
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO
[:SOURce[<n>]]:VOLTage:UNIT
:SYSTem Commands
:SYSTem:BEEPer[:IMMediate]
:SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe
:SYSTem:CHANnel:CURrent
:SYSTem:CHANnel:NUMber?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:APPLy
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:AUTOip[:STATe]
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:CONTrol?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DHCP[:STATe]
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DNS
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DOMain
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:GATEway
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:HOSTname
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:MAC?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SMASk
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:STATic[:STATe]
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:UPDate
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:INFormation?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB[:SELF]:CLASs
Chapter 5 Appendix RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 5-9
:SYSTem:CSCopy
:SYSTem:ERRor?
:SYSTem:KLOCk[:STATe]
:SYSTem:LANGuage
:SYSTem:POWeron
:SYSTem:PRESet
:SYSTem:ROSCillator:SOURce
:SYSTem:SECurity:IMMediate
:SYSTem:VERSion?
:TRIGger Commands
:TRIGger[<n>]:DELay
:TRIGger[<n>][:IMMediate]
:TRIGger[<n>]:SLOPe
:TRIGger[<n>]:SOURce
RIGOL Chapter 5 Appendix
5-10 DG1000Z Programming Guide
Appendix B: Factory Setting
The factory settings are as shown in the table below. Note that the items marked with “*” are set at the
factory and are related to the set of the users and will not be affected by the reset operation.
Parameters Defaults
Channel Parameters
Current Carrier Waveform
Sine
Output Impedance HighZ
Output Load
50Ω
Sync Output On
Sync Polarity Pos
Sync Delay
0s
Channel Output Normal
Output Mode
Normal
Gated Polarity Pos
Range
Auto
Waveform Sum Switch Off
Sum Source Sine
Sum Frequency 1kHz
Sum Ratio 100%
Basic Waveform
Frequency
1kHz
Amplitude 5Vpp
Amplitude Unit
Vpp
Offset 0VDC
Start Phase 0°
Square Duty Cycle
50%
Ramp Waveform Symmetry 50%
Pulse Duty Cycle
50%
Pulse Width 500μs
Pulse Leading Edge 20ns
Pulse Trailing Edge 20ns
Harmonic Type Even
Harmonic Order
2
Harmonic Phase (7) 0°
Harmonic Serial Number
2
Harmonic Amplitude (7) 1.2647Vpp
Harmonic State Off
User-defined X0000000
Arb Waveform
Sample Rate 20MSa/s
DC Offset
0VDC
Arb Waveform Mode Frequency
Built-in Arbitrary Waveform
Sinc
Insret Waveform
Insert position 1
Insert Way Insert
Cycles 1
Points
8
High Level 2.5V
Low Level
-2.5V
Chapter 5 Appendix RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 5-11
Edit Points
Points 1
Voltage -2.5V
Edit Block
X1 1
Y1
-2.5V
X2 8
Y2
-2.5V
Modulation
Modulation Type
AM
AM Modulation
Modulation Source
Int
Modulating Waveform Shape Sine
Modulation Frequency 100Hz
Modulation Depth 100%
Carrier Waveform Suppression Off
FM Modulation
Modulation Source Int
Modulating Waveform Shape
Sine
Modulation Frequency 100Hz
Frequency Deviation 1kHz
PM Modulation
Modulation Source Int
Modulating Waveform Shape
Sine
Modulation Frequency 100Hz
Phase Deviation
90°
ASK Modulation
Modulation Source
Int
ASK Rate 100Hz
Modulation Amplitude 2Vpp
ASK Polarity
Pos
FSK Modulation
Modulation Source
Int
FSK Rate 100Hz
Hop Frequency
10kHz
FSK Polarity Pos
PSK Modulation
Modulation Source
Int
PSK Rate 100Hz
PSK Phase
180°
PSK Polarity Pos
PWM Modulation
Modulation Source Int
Modulating Waveform Shape Sine
Modulation Frequency
100Hz
Width Deviation 200μs
Duty Cycle Deviation
20%
Sweep
Sweep Type Linear
Sweep Time 1s
Return Time
0s
Start Frequency 100Hz
Stop Frequency
1kHz
RIGOL Chapter 5 Appendix
5-12 DG1000Z Programming Guide
Center Frequency 550Hz
Frequency Span 900Hz
Start Hold 0s
Stop Hold
0s
Mark Frequency State Off
Mark Frequency
550Hz
Trigger Source Int
Trigger Output
Off
SlopeIn Leading
Step Number 2
Burst
Burst Mode
N Cycle
Cycle Number 1
Burst Period 10ms
Gated Polarity Pos
Trigger Source Int
Trigger Output
Off
Trigger Input Leading
Delay
0ns
Interface Focus Items
Frequency/Period Freq
Amplitude/High Level Ampl
Offset/Low Level
Offset
Pulse Width/Duty Cycle Duty
Start/Center
Start
Stop/Span Stop
Frequency Coupling Deviation/Ratio
Ratio
Amplitude Coupling Deviation/Ratio Ratio
Phase Coupling Deviation/Ratio Ratio
Default Channel
CH1
Counter
Measurement Parameter Frequency
Gate Time
1ms
Statistic Function Off
Display Mode Digital
Trigger Sensitivity
25%
Trigger Level 0V
Coupling Mode
AC
High-frequency Suppression Off
System Parameter
Coupling Set
Frequency Coupling
Off
Frequency Deviation 0uHz
Frequency Ratio
1
Amplitude Coupling Off
Amplitude Deviation
0Vpp
Amplitude Ratio 1
Phase Coupling Off
Phase Deviation
0
°
Phase Ratio 1
Track
Off
Chapter 5 Appendix RIGOL
DG1000Z Programming Guide 5-13
Print Set
Print Switch Off
Print Destination Usb Disk
Print Format
Bmp
Print Copies 0
Print Palette
Gray
Invert On
UI Customization
Set Coordinate* (0,0)
System Set
Power On Setting
Default
Clock Source Int
Decimal Point
Dot
Thousand Separator Comma
Beeper On
Screen Saver On
Brightness
*
50%
Contrast*
25%
Display Mode* Dual Channels Parameters
Language*
Factory Delivery Setting
I/O Configuration
USB Device Type Computer
GPIB
*
2
DHCP*
On (default setting in LAN)
Auto IP
*
On (default setting in LAN)
Manual IP*
Off (default setting in LAN)
RIGOL Chapter 5 Appendix
5-14 DG1000Z Programming Guide
Appendix C: Warranty
RIGOL warrants that its products mainframe and accessories will be free from defects in materials and
workmanship within the warranty period.
If a product is proven to be defective within the respective period, RIGOL guarantees the free replacement
or repair of products which are approved defective. To get repair service, please contact with your nearest
RIGOL sales and service office.
RIGOL does not provide any other warranty items except the one being provided by this summary and the
warranty statement. The warranty items include but not being subjected to the hint guarantee items related
to tradable characteristic and any particular purpose. RIGOL will not take any responsibility in cases
regarding to indirect, particular and ensuing damage.

Navigation menu